Programmer's Reference Manual

IPL (Intermec Printer Language)

Intermec Technologies Corporation Corporate Headquarters 6001 36th Ave. W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2003 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, CrossBar, Data Collection Browser, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyCoder, EasyLAN, Enterprise Wireless LAN, EZBuilder, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), InterDriver, Intermec Printer Network Manager, IRL, JANUS, LabelShop, Mobile Framework, MobileLAN, Nor*Ware, Pen*Key, Precision Print, PrintSet, RoutePower, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, UAP, Universal Access Point, and Virtual Wedge are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Throughout this manual, trademarked names may be used. Rather than put a trademark ( or ) symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name, we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement. There are U.S. and foreign patents pending. The name Centronics is wholly owned by GENICOM Corporation. IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. The software contained in the Intermec Printers and the accompanying materials are copyrighted. Unauthorized copying of the software, including software that has been modified, merged, or included with other software, or the written materials is expressly forbidden without the prior written consent of Intermec. All right, title, and interest in all copies of this software are and shall at all times remain the sole and exclusive property of Intermec. Customer may be held legally responsible for any copyright infringement that is caused or encouraged by its failure to abide by these terms.

ii

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Document Change Record

Revision 003 004 005 006 Date 10/00 04/01 12/01 03/03 Changes Revised throughout to include EasyCoder F4 printer information. Revised to include 3400e series printer information. Revised to include 44X0 printer information. Revised to include: IPL firmware versions 1.4 and 2.0 functionality Command information for the PF2i, PF4i, and PM4i printers Revised to include minor changes. Added new Slash Zero, Enable or Disable command.

007

10/03

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

iii

iv

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Contents

Contents
Before You Begin.............................................................................................................. xiii Safety Summary................................................................................................... xiii Safety Icons ..........................................................................................................xiv Global Services and Support .................................................................................xiv Who Should Read This Document? ......................................................................xv Related Documents ...............................................................................................xv

Introduction to IPL Commands ............................................................................................. 1

What Is IPL?........................................................................................................................ 2 What Are IPL Commands?.................................................................................................. 2 Programming for Intermec Printers ..................................................................................... 3 Learning the Structure of IPL Commands ........................................................................... 3 Using Control Characters in IPL Command Strings ............................................................ 4 Sending IPL Commands to the Printer ................................................................................ 5 Downloading Commands From Windows ............................................................. 6 Sending a String of Commands Through an Application........................................ 7 Example 1.................................................................................................. 7 Example 2.................................................................................................. 7 Switching Between Print Mode and Program Mode ............................................................ 7 What to Read Next.............................................................................................................. 8

Downloading Fonts to the Printer ...................................................................................... 9

What Types of Fonts Can I Download?............................................................................. 10 Using PrintSet Version 2.0 or Higher to Download Fonts ................................................. 11 Installing International Character Sets Using GLOBE ....................................................... 13 What Types of Fonts Does GLOBE Support? ...................................................... 13 Do You Need to Purchase Additional RAM? ........................................................ 14 Licensing Your Fonts ............................................................................................ 15 Creating Bitmap Fonts From TrueType Fonts...................................................... 15 Selecting the Printer Language.............................................................................. 17 Installing Code Page Tables .................................................................................. 17 Using IPL Commands to Download Fonts ........................................................................ 18 Downloading Bitmap Fonts.................................................................................. 18 Downloading Outline Fonts ................................................................................. 18 Using Third-Party Software Applications to Download Fonts............................................ 19

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Contents

Designing Bar Code Labels .................................................................................................... 21

Introduction to Formats .................................................................................................... 22 Tutorial for Designing and Creating a Label Format.......................................................... 22 Defining Label Design Fields ............................................................................................. 27 Bar Code Fields .................................................................................................... 27 Human-Readable Fields........................................................................................ 27 Line and Box Fields .............................................................................................. 28 Lines and Boxes Format.............................................................. 29 Graphic Fields ...................................................................................................... 30 Editing Label Formats and Working With Fields............................................................... 31 Editing Existing Fields .......................................................................................... 33 Deleting Fields...................................................................................................... 34 Positioning Fields ................................................................................................. 34 Rotating Fields ..................................................................................................... 35 Scaling Fields........................................................................................................ 36 Magnifying Fonts and Character Fields ................................................... 36 Magnifying Bar Code Fields .................................................................... 37 Designing Pages.................................................................................................... 38 Label Format Example....................................................................................................... 38 Graphic for Example............................................................................................. 39 Format for Example.............................................................................................. 39 Data for Example.................................................................................................. 40

Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... 43
Troubleshooting Checklist................................................................................................. 44 How the Printer Handles Error Conditions ....................................................................... 44 Syntax Errors ........................................................................................................ 44 Parameter Errors................................................................................................... 45 Image Overrun Errors........................................................................................... 45 Invalid Numeric Character Errors......................................................................... 45 Insufficient Storage Memory Errors ...................................................................... 45 Interpreting Error Codes and Solving Problems ................................................................. 46

Advanced Printer Programming ........................................................................................ 49

Using the Printer Memory Efficiently ................................................................................ 50 How Is the Printer Storage Memory Used? ........................................................... 50 Making the Most of Your Storage Memory........................................................... 50 Increasing Throughput ...................................................................................................... 51 What Is an Image Band? ....................................................................................... 51 How the Image Bands Command Works ............................................................. 52 Optimizing Print Speed and Image Band Setting.................................................. 52 Image Band Example.................................................................. 53

vi

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Contents

Reimaging Modified Fields ................................................................................... 55 Optimizing Image Bands for Batch Printing ......................................................... 56 Using Emulation Mode ..................................................................................................... 56

Finding IPL Commands in This Manual .......................................................................... 63

Commands Listed by Name............................................................................................... 64 Commands Listed by Syntax.............................................................................................. 68 Commands Listed by Task................................................................................................. 72 Immediate Commands ............................................................................ 72 Program Mode Commands ..................................................................... 72 Print Mode Commands........................................................................... 76 Test and Service Commands.................................................................... 78

IPL Command Reference ......................................................................................................... 79

Which Commands Does Your Printer Support? ................................................................ 80 Immediate Commands ...................................................................................................... 86 Abort Print Job..................................................................................................... 86 Error Code, Request ............................................................................................. 86 Label and Gap Length, Transmit .......................................................................... 87 Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit................................................. 87 Reset..................................................................................................................... 87 Status Dump ........................................................................................................ 88 Status Enquiry ...................................................................................................... 89 Print Commands ............................................................................................................... 90 Advanced Mode, Select......................................................................................... 91 Alphanumeric Field Separator............................................................................... 92 Batch Count, Set .................................................................................................. 93 Clear All Data....................................................................................................... 93 Clear Data From Current Field............................................................................. 93 Command Terminator 1 ...................................................................................... 93 Command Terminator 2 ...................................................................................... 94 Configuration Parameters, Transmit..................................................................... 94 Cut ....................................................................................................................... 94 Data Shift International Characters ................................................................... 94 Direct Graphics Mode, Select ............................................................................... 96 Emulation Mode, Enter........................................................................................ 97 Field, Select .......................................................................................................... 97 Field Decrement, Set ............................................................................................ 98 Field Increment, Set.............................................................................................. 99 First Data Entry Field, Select ................................................................................ 99 Font, Transmit ................................................................................................... 100 Form Feed .......................................................................................................... 101 Format, Select..................................................................................................... 101 Format, Transmit ............................................................................................... 103 Increment and Decrement, Disable..................................................................... 104

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

vii

Contents

Memory Usage, Transmit ................................................................................... 105 Next Data Entry Field, Select ............................................................................. 106 Numeric Field Separator..................................................................................... 106 Options Selected, Transmit ................................................................................ 107 Page, Select......................................................................................................... 108 Page, Transmit.................................................................................................... 108 Print ................................................................................................................... 109 Printhead Parameters, Transmit.......................................................................... 109 Program Mode, Enter ......................................................................................... 109 Program Number, Transmit ............................................................................... 110 Quantity Count, Set ........................................................................................... 110 Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print................................................................ 110 Storage Area Usage, Transmit ............................................................................. 111 Test and Service Mode, Enter ............................................................................. 111 User-Defined Characters, Transmit .................................................................... 111 User-Defined Tables, Transmit........................................................................... 112 Warm Boot......................................................................................................... 112 Configuration Commands ............................................................................................... 113 Amount of Storage, Define ................................................................................. 114 Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable....................................................................... 114 Auto-Transmit 1, Enable .................................................................................... 115 Auto-Transmit 2, Enable .................................................................................... 115 Auto-Transmit 3, Enable .................................................................................... 115 Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable .................................................................... 115 Communication Port Configuration, Set ............................................................ 116 Control Panel Access Permission, Set.................................................................. 117 Cutter, Enable or Disable ................................................................................... 118 Dark Adjust, Set ................................................................................................. 118 Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up ...................................................... 119 End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set.......................................................................... 120 IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable.................................................... 122 Intercharacter Delay, Set..................................................................................... 122 Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable .......................................................... 123 Label Rest Point, Adjust ..................................................................................... 123 Label Retract, Enable or Disable ......................................................................... 124 Label Retract Distance, Set ................................................................................. 124 Label Stock Type, Select ..................................................................................... 125 Label Width, Set................................................................................................. 125 Maximum Label Length, Set............................................................................... 126 Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set ........................................................................ 127 Media Sensitivity, Select ..................................................................................... 127 Message Delay, Set ............................................................................................. 128 Number of Image Bands, Set .............................................................................. 129 Online or Offline on Power-Up.......................................................................... 130 Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set....................................................................................... 130 Postamble, Set .................................................................................................... 131 Preamble, Set...................................................................................................... 131 Print Speed, Set .................................................................................................. 132 Printer Language, Select...................................................................................... 133 Printhead Loading Mode, Select ......................................................................... 135 Printhead Pressure, Set........................................................................................ 136 Printhead Test Parameters, Set............................................................................ 136

viii

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Contents

Ribbon Save Zones, Set ...................................................................................... 137 Self-Strip, Enable or Disable ............................................................................... 137 Serial Port Configuration, Set ............................................................................. 138 Slash Zero, Enable or Disable ............................................................................. 138 Takeup Motor Torque, Increase ......................................................................... 139 Top of Form, Set ................................................................................................ 139 Program Mode Commands.............................................................................................. 140 Bar Code, Select Type ........................................................................................ 141 Code 39................................................................................................. 142 Code 93................................................................................................. 142 Interleaved 2 of 5................................................................................... 143 Code 2 of 5............................................................................................ 143 Codabar................................................................................................. 143 Code 11................................................................................................. 144 Code 128............................................................................................... 144 UPC/EAN............................................................................................. 146 HIBC Code 39...................................................................................... 147 Code 16K.............................................................................................. 147 Code 49................................................................................................. 148 POSTNET ............................................................................................ 148 PDF417................................................................................................. 148 Using ,m1 to Select the Number of Columns ........................... 149 Using ,m2 to Select an Error Correction Level .......................... 149 Using ,m3 to Set the Truncate Flag........................................... 150 Code One.............................................................................................. 151 Using m1 to Select a Code One Version ................................... 152 Using ,m2 and ,m3 to Group Symbols...................................... 154 Defining Height and Width for Code One............................... 154 Using Groups of Code One Symbols........................................ 154 MaxiCode.............................................................................................. 154 JIS-ITF.................................................................................................. 156 HIBC Code 128.................................................................................... 157 Data Matrix Symbology Versions ECC-100 and ECC-200 ................... 158 QR Code............................................................................................... 159 MicroPDF417 ....................................................................................... 160 Bar Code Field, Create or Edit............................................................................ 161 Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define ............................................... 162 Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define ................................................ 164 Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define ....................................................... 165 Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define................................................... 165 Box Field, Create or Edit .................................................................................... 166 Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define ............................................................. 167 Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define ................................................... 168 Code 39 Prefix Character, Define ....................................................................... 171 Command Tables, Load ..................................................................................... 171 Current Edit Session, Save .................................................................................. 172 Data Source for Format in a Page, Define........................................................... 172 Field, Delete ....................................................................................................... 172 Field Data, Define Source................................................................................... 173 Field Direction, Define....................................................................................... 175 Field Origin, Define ........................................................................................... 175 Font Character Width, Define............................................................................ 176

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

ix

Contents

Font Type, Select................................................................................................ 178 Format, Create or Edit........................................................................................ 180 Format Direction in a Page, Define .................................................................... 181 Format, Erase...................................................................................................... 182 Format Offset Within a Page, Define.................................................................. 182 Format Page Position, Define Data Source ......................................................... 182 Format Position From Page, Delete .................................................................... 183 Format Position in a Page, Assign ....................................................................... 183 Graphic, Select ................................................................................................... 184 Graphic or UDC, Define.................................................................................... 184 Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define ........................................... 185 Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit ............................................................... 187 Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define................................................................. 188 Interpretive Field, Edit........................................................................................ 189 Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable................................................................... 190 Length of Line or Box Field, Define ................................................................... 190 Line Field, Create or Edit ................................................................................... 191 Outline Font, Clear or Create............................................................................. 191 Outline Font, Download .................................................................................... 193 Page, Create or Edit............................................................................................ 194 Page, Delete........................................................................................................ 195 Pitch Size, Set ..................................................................................................... 195 Point Size, Set..................................................................................................... 196 Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set......................................................................... 196 Program Mode, Exit ........................................................................................... 197 User-Defined Character, Clear or Create ............................................................ 197 User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit ..................................................... 197 User-Defined Font Character, Create ................................................................. 198 Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define.................................................... 199 Test and Service Commands............................................................................................ 201 12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit ......................................................................... 201 Ambient Temperature, Transmit ........................................................................ 201 Command Terminator ....................................................................................... 201 Dark Adjust........................................................................................................ 201 Factory Defaults, Reset ....................................................................................... 202 Formats, Print .................................................................................................... 202 Hardware Configuration Label, Print ................................................................. 202 Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit ........................................................... 202 Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit .................................................................. 202 Pages, Print......................................................................................................... 203 Pitch Label, Print................................................................................................ 203 Print Quality Label, Print ................................................................................... 203 Printhead Resistance Test, Begin ........................................................................ 203 Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit................................................................ 203 Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit ................................................. 203 Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit .............................................................. 204 Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit....................................................................... 204 Software Configuration Label, Print ................................................................... 204 Test and Service Mode, Exit ............................................................................... 204 Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit.................................................................. 204 User-Defined Characters (UDC) and Graphics, Print......................................... 204 User-Defined Fonts, Print .................................................................................. 205

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Contents

A
B

Full ASCII Table ........................................................................................................................... 207

Full ASCII Table ............................................................................................................. 208 Full ASCII Control Characters Table............................................................................... 210

Character Sets ............................................................................................................................. 211

International Character Sets............................................................................................. 212 Advanced Character Table .................................................................................. 212 8636/46 Character Table.................................................................................... 212 IBM Translation Character Table....................................................................... 213 Code Page 850 Character Table.......................................................................... 214 Extended Character Sets .................................................................................................. 215

Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts.............................................. 219

Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics ......................................................................... 220 Creating One Bit Per Byte User-Defined Graphics ............................................. 220 Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Graphics .............................................. 224 Creating User-Defined Bitmap Fonts............................................................................... 227 Creating One Bit Per Byte User-Defined Fonts .................................................. 227 Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Fonts ................................................... 228

User-Defined Interface Tables ........................................................................................... 231

Print Commands (t = 0) .................................................................................................. 232 Escape Print Commands (t = 1)....................................................................................... 233 Shift Print Commands (t = 2).......................................................................................... 234 Status Responses and Auto-Transmit Commands (t = 3) ................................................. 235 Protocol Commands (t = 4)............................................................................................. 236 Communications Protocol Characters.............................................................................. 237

Using Direct Graphics Mode ............................................................................................... 239

What Is Direct Graphics Mode?....................................................................................... 240 What Is Run-Length Encoding?.......................................................................... 240 How Do I Send a Direct Graphic to the Printer? ................................................ 242 Direct Graphics Mode, Enter................................................................. 242 Change Origin....................................................................................... 243 End of Bitmap ....................................................................................... 243 End of Line............................................................................................ 243 Raw Bitmap Data Follows ..................................................................... 244

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

xi

Contents

Repeat Last Line .................................................................................... 244 Transition Black .................................................................................... 244 Transition White ................................................................................... 244 Using Direct Graphics Commands ..................................................................... 245

Index ................................................................................................................................................. 247

xii

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Before You Begin

Before You Begin

This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information.

Safety Summary
Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions.

Do not repair or adjust alone

Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circumstances. Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present for your safety.

First aid
Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury. Never neglect an injury, no matter how slight it seems.

Resuscitation
Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing. Any delay could result in death. To work on or near high voltage, you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods.

Energized equipment
Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible authority. Energized electrical equipment is dangerous. Electrical shock from energized equipment can cause death. If you must perform authorized emergency work on energized equipment, be sure that you comply strictly with approved safety regulations.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

xiii

Before You Begin

Safety Icons
This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this document. You may also see icons that tell you when to follow ESD procedures and when to take special precautions for handling optical parts. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. Attention: Une prcaution vous avertit dune procdure de fonctionnement, dune mthode, dun tat ou dun rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour empcher lendommagement ou la destruction de lquipement, ou laltration ou la perte de donnes. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances.

Global Services and Support

Warranty Information
To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com and click Service & Support. The Intermec Global Sales & Service page appears. From the Service & Support menu, move your pointer over Support, and then click Warranty. Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided as is with all faults. All warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Web Support
Visit the Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com to download our current documents in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at http://intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product.

xiv

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Before You Begin

Telephone Support
These services are available from Intermec Technologies Corporation.
In the U.S.A. and Canada call 1-800-755-5505 and choose this option 1

Service Factory Repair and On-site Repair

Description Request a return authorization number for authorized service center repair, or request an onsite repair technician. Get technical support on your Intermec product. Inquire about an existing contract, renew a contract, or ask invoicing questions. Schedule a site survey, or request a product or system installation. Talk to sales administration, place an order, or check the status of your order.

Technical Support Service Contract Status Schedule Site Surveys or Installations Ordering Products

2 3

Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click Contact.

Who Should Read This Document?

The document explains how to use the Intermec Printer Language (IPL) and provides a chapter on the IPL commands. Before you use IPL, you should be familiar with your network, general networking terms, such as IP address, and your bar code label printers.

Related Documents
The Intermec web site at http://www.intermec.com contains our current documents that you can download in PDF format. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

xv

Before You Begin

xvi

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Introduction to IPL Commands

This chapter describes Intermecs approach to printing labels and introduces the Intermec Printer Language (IPL) command set. The chapter also explains how to switch between Print and Program modes, how to send IPL files to a printer, and how to use ASCII control characters in IPL commands. The chapter concludes with a roadmap to the rest of the manual. In this manual, printer can refer to the 3240, 3400, 3440, 3600, 4100, 4400, 4420, 4440, 4630, 4830, 7421, EasyCoder PF2i, EasyCoder PF4i, EasyCoder PM4i, or EasyCoder F4 bar code printer.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction to IPL Commands

What Is IPL?
Intermec Printer Language (IPL) is the programming language that has been developed for use with Intermec printers. IPL is an easy-to-use programming language that allows you to: design formats (templates) for bar code labels. download bar code label formats to the printer. modify a bar code label format that is stored in the printer. download data to fill in a bar code label format and print the label. enable or disable printer features and options. query the printer for hardware diagnostic data and the status of print jobs. abort print jobs and reset the printer.

What Are IPL Commands?

There are five types of IPL commands (Print, Program, Test and Service, Configuration, and Immediate) and these types are related to the printers three operating modes (Print, Program, and Test and Service). That is, in order to execute an IPL command, the printer must be in the operating mode that corresponds to the IPL commands type. IPL Command Types and Descriptions
IPL Command Type Print Program Test and Service Configuration Immediate Printer Operating Mode Print mode Program mode Test and Service mode Print mode Any operating mode Uses for This Type of IPL Command Download data to the printer and print bar code labels. Design label formats. Query the printer for hardware diagnostic information. Enable or disable printer features and options. Query the printer on the status of print jobs, abort print jobs, and reset the printer.

Note: The printer executes Immediate commands as soon as it receives them, even if there are other IPL commands waiting to be executed.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction to IPL Commands

The printer does not execute a command that does not match the current operating mode. For example, if you send a Program command while the printer is in Print mode, the printer ignores the Program command. See Switching Between Print Mode and Program Mode later in this chapter, or refer to your printer users manual for help changing the mode of your printer.

Programming for Intermec Printers

When you program in IPL, you must understand the approach that Intermec uses to print bar code labels. It is a two-step process: 1 Design the format (or template) for the bar code label, and then send the format to the printer, where it is stored in memory. 2 Send another command to the printer that specifies the data for the fields of the format and prints the label. Note: It is not always necessary to send the format and the data to the printer separately. You can send fixed data formats or even variable data formats that include the data in the same file. If you skip Step 1 and do not specify a format, the printer assumes you want to use the default format, which is stored permanently in the printer. The printer will print the label using that format. The default format is called format 0. You can store multiple formats on your printer. Many Intermec printers can store up to 19 formats, but some printers (such as the 3240 and 3440) can store up to 99. To learn how many formats your printer can store, see the Format, Create or Edit command in Chapter 7.

Learning the Structure of IPL Commands

This section describes general principles to follow when creating or downloading IPL commands. Note: The syntax of each IPL command is described in detail in Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference. IPL commands are case sensitive. Type them as they appear in this manual. For example, if the command is an uppercase A, do not enter it as a lowercase a. Each command string that you download to a printer must begin with the start of text character <STX> and end with the end of text character <ETX>.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction to IPL Commands

Note: When the printer is in XON/XOFF mode, you can send data and print multiple labels without using the <ETX> character. The <STX> and <ETX> commands mark the beginning and end of a message. The semicolon (;) is the command terminator. All commands in Program mode or Test and Service mode must end with this terminator except the last command in a string. Commands in Print mode do not require the semicolon command terminator. For example, a simple IPL command string looks like this:
<STX>E2;F2<ETX>

Using Control Characters in IPL Command Strings

Formats that you design with IPL commands require you to enter ASCII control characters in your command strings. To create ASCII control characters, either: enter a control code or type the printable command characters. Many word processing programs have the ability to represent ASCII control characters such as <ETX> by entering a control code. For example, to enter the hexadecimal equivalent of the ASCII character <ETX> on your computer, you would type the control code 03. For help finding the hexadecimal equivalent of a control character, consult the full ASCII table in Appendix A. If it is difficult for you to edit or transmit IPL command files that contain ASCII control characters, you can use printable control characters instead. A printable control character (or readable character) is a text string, enclosed in angle brackets, that represents an ASCII control character. For example, instead of entering a control code for the ASCII start of text character, you can type these five readable characters:
<STX>

To determine the readable character for each ASCII control character, see the full ASCII table in Appendix A. Simply enclose the text string in the ASCII column in angle brackets to create the readable character. The printer automatically detects whether you are using ASCII control characters or readable characters by the start of text (<STX>) character, which marks the beginning of an IPL command message. All characters in a message must be in the same form (ASCII control character or readable characters) as the start of text character. For example, if you begin a message with the readable characters <STX>, the printer executes only the readable characters in the message and throws away any ASCII control characters in the message.
4 IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction to IPL Commands

Using readable characters may consume more space and time, but it has the distinct advantage of displaying everything on the screen in readable characters. Here is an example of using control codes:
^B^Og1,567^C

where:
^B ^O ^C

is the control code representation of hex 02 (the <STX> character). is the control code representation of hex 0F (the <SI> character). is the control code representation of hex 03 (the <ETX> character).

Here is an example of using printable control characters:

<STX><SI>g1,567<ETX>

Sending IPL Commands to the Printer

Before you can send IPL commands to the printer, you need to: connect the printer to a PC. create an ASCII text file of IPL commands. To connect the printer to a PC 1 Connect the printer to the serial port on your PC using the correct cable. For help selecting a cable, see your users manual. 2 Configure the PC for a serial connection to the printer by typing this command at the DOS prompt and pressing Enter. The following example assumes that your serial connection is COM1.
MODE COM1 96,E,7,1,N

These serial connection characteristics are the default for the printer. 3 Make sure the printer is configured for the hardware flow control (XON/XOFF) communications protocol. This protocol is the default. For help, see your printer users manual. Note: If you receive the write fault error error message, it indicates that either you are sending the data to the wrong COM port or your cable does not support hardware flow control. Try sending the data via Windows using the information below.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction to IPL Commands

To create an ASCII text file of IPL commands 1 Create a set of IPL commands. For help, see Chapter 2, Downloading Fonts to the Printer, or Chapter 3, Designing Bar Code Labels. 2 Type the commands into the text file using any text editor or word processor and save the file as an ASCII text file. Your ASCII text file can contain an entire label format or just a single configuration command that you use often. For example, if you need to set the media sensitivity number often, you may want to create a text file that contains the IPL command line:
<STX><SI>g1,567<ETX>.

You can send IPL commands to the printer in many ways. This section describes two simple methods: Downloading commands from Windows Sending a string of commands through an application

Downloading Commands From Windows

After you create a text file of IPL commands, you can use Windows HyperTerminal to send the file to the printer. To download commands using HyperTerminal 1 Start the HyperTerminal application. 2 In the Connection Description dialog box, enter a name for your new connection and click OK. 3 In the Phone number dialog box, select a serial port from the Connect using list box and click OK. 4 In the COM Properties dialog box, set the port settings to your printer communication settings. If you have not changed the printer default settings, enter the following information and click OK: Bits per second Data bits Parity Stop bit Flow control 9600 7 even 1 XON/XOFF

5 From the Main menu bar, select Transfer. 6 From the Transfer list box, select Send Text File. 7 In the Send Text File dialog box, locate your .TXT file and click Open. HyperTerminal sends the .TXT file to your printer. Your command text file will either change a configuration setting in the printer or print your label format.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction to IPL Commands

Sending a String of Commands Through an Application

You can send a string of IPL commands through a PC communications application, a terminal emulation application, or a host terminal. See the applications documentation for instructions. The disadvantage of sending a string of commands is that you must retype the entire command string if you make an error while entering the commands. It is easier to retype a command if you keep the command strings short; therefore, you should design your label formats as combinations of several short command strings rather than one very long string. To illustrate this idea, consider the next examples, which show two ways to send a bar code label format to the printer. Example 1 uses several short command strings to define the format. Example 2 combines all of the commands into a single string.

Example 1
<STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E3;F3;<ETX> <STX>H0;o81,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX> <STX>H1;o81,120;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX> <STX>H2;o81,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1;<ETX> <STX>H3;o81,190;f0;c2;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX> <STX>B4;o81,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;p@;<ETX> <STX>R<ETX>

Example 2
<STX><ESC>P;E3;F3;H0;o81,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;H1;o81,120; f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;H2;o81,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1;H3;o81,190; f0;c2;d0,16;h1;w1;B4;o81,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;p@; R<ETX>

In Example 1, each line begins with the start of text character <STX> and finishes with the end of text character <ETX>. If you make a mistake, you need to retype only the line with the mistake. In Example 2, if you made a mistake anywhere in the string, you must retype the entire format. Example 1 takes slightly longer to download, but is much easier to read and debug.

Switching Between Print Mode and Program Mode

Print mode and Program mode are two different operating modes of the printer. Before you download information to the printer, make sure that you are in the correct mode: Use Program mode to define formats, pages, fonts, and characters. Use Print mode to print labels, to download data, or to download configuration commands to the printer.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 1 Introduction to IPL Commands

To enter Program mode on any printer Type this command:

<STX><ESC>P<ETX>

Send this command every time that you download formats, even if you think the printer is already in Program mode. If the printer is already in Program mode, it ignores this command. To enter Print mode on any printer Type this command:
<STX>R<ETX>

Send this command before each set of data or as your last format command. If the printer is already in Print mode, it ignores this command. Note: The R command may be treated as data if the data to the printer does not include a <CAN> or field pointer to clear the fields.

What to Read Next

Now that you have been introduced to IPL commands, you can use this manual to learn how to perform these tasks:
For Help With This Task To download any font to the printer To design and code the formats for bar code labels To diagnose and solve problems with IPL commands To learn how to use printer memory efficiently, how to increase throughput, and when to use Emulation mode To find a specific IPL command To look up the exact syntax and description of any IPL command To refer to the Full ASCII table To see the character set tables To create your own fonts and graphics To refer to the user-defined interface tables To download direct graphics See Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Downloading Fonts to the Printer

This chapter explains how to download fonts to your Intermec printer. You can use PrintSet, IPL commands, or third-party software applications.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

What Types of Fonts Can I Download?

You can download these types of fonts to most Intermec printers: Bitmap Outline (TrueType and Speedo) Note: The 3400, 3400e, 3440, 4420, 4440, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, and EasyCoder F4 printers support the use of scaleable TrueType fonts. Bitmap fonts can be used on any Intermec printer, including those TrueType fonts you have converted to bitmap using PrintSet. The PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, and EasyCoder F4 do not support Speedo fonts. In addition to the fonts permanently resident in your printer, you can download fonts in the form of user-defined bitmap or outline (scaleable) fonts. Use this section to learn about the differences between bitmap and outline fonts and how to choose the type of font you want to use. Bitmap fonts commonly: print in one fixed size. (If you magnify the font, they print but are ragged.) print quickly. are memory intensive when defined as large characters. Outline fonts commonly: vary in size. You can print any size character up to 10.16 cm (4 in). print smooth characters. image slower than bitmap fonts. Your printer supports two types of outline fonts: TrueType (support available only on the 3400, 3400e, 3440, 4420, 4440, EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, and PM4i printers) and Speedo (not supported on the EasyCoder F4, PF21, PF4i, or PM4i). TrueType fonts are the most popular outline fonts, and several are available through Windows on your PC. For help locating Speedo fonts, contact Intermec Technical Support.

10

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

See the next table to decide which fonts best suit your needs. Font Selection Table
Concern image speed availability storage space Bitmap fastest extensive varies TrueType medium extensive with Windows 50 - 80K per font usually; Japanese, Chinese and Korean are considerably larger variable Speedo fast limited 20 - 30K per font

size

fixed

variable

You can download fonts to the printer and store them in the non-volatile memory. Although the printer reserves 16 font ID numbers (3 to 6, and 8 to 19) for you to download fonts, memory constraints may limit the number of fonts you can store.

Using PrintSet Version 2.0 or Higher to Download Fonts

The easiest way to download fonts to the printer is with the PrintSet printer configuration application. This application is on the CD that shipped with your printer. You can also download the latest release of PrintSet from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. You can use PrintSet to select fonts and directly download them to your printer. Bitmap fonts can be memory intensive, so you may decide not to download the entire font to the printer. You can use PrintSet to define a subset of the font (only the numbers, for example). Then you can download the subset, saving storage space on the printer. The printer requires that bitmap fonts be in one of these formats: one bit per byte or six bits per byte. PrintSet automatically converts all bitmap fonts into the six bits per byte format. PrintSet automatically converts scaleable outline fonts into nibblized data that you can download to the printer. PrintSet can also convert fixed outline fonts into bitmap fonts that you can download to the printer. To select a font with PrintSet 1 Start PrintSet. 2 Make sure that the communications settings are correct. 3 From the Configuration menu, select Fonts or on the toolbar, click the Font Setup button.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

11

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

The Font Setup dialog box appears:

4 To select a font by font name, click the Select Installed Font button. From the list of installed fonts, select your TrueType font name. To select a font by pathname, click the Select Font Path button. Select a drive and a path. From the File name list box, select a TrueType font file (*.TTF). 5 In the Storage Option box:
Click the Scaleable option button if you are downloading an outline

font. (This option is disabled if your printer does not support TrueType.)
Click the Fixed option button if you are downloading a bitmap font.

6 (Bitmap fonts only) Select the size option, point size, and character set as needed. 7 In the Location list box, choose the font number you wish to assign to the font. Intermec printers identify each font by its font number. You may select additional fonts to add to local memory. Each font must have a unique location number. 8 Click Apply. 9 Click the View tab. The Fonts to send box displays the selected fonts and the designated printer locations. 10 Click OK to exit the Font Setup dialog box. Now that you have defined your font, you need to either install it in your printer or save it to a file. Follow one of these procedures to complete the process.

12

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

To install fonts in your printer From the DataXfer menu, select Send to printer or on the toolbar, click the Send Config to Printer button. Note: If you download an incompatible TrueType font, the font type will be 999. If you select the incompatible font for a text field, the printer will print the default font 0. To save a font to a file and copy it to your printer 1 From the File menu, select Save as or on the toolbar, click the Save As button. The Save As dialog box appears. 2 In the Save As dialog box, enter a path and filename. The file must use a .PCF extension. For example, you could name your file NEWFONT.PCF. 3 Click the Save button. When you save the font to file, the IPL commands necessary to install the font are automatically written to the file. 4 Use Windows HyperTerminal to download the *.PCF file to your printer.

Installing International Character Sets Using GLOBE

Intermecs goal is to help you easily localize your printer with the font set you choose. To support this goal, Intermec printers now use GLOBE (Global Languages On Bar Code Equipment) technology to download and access single- and double-byte international character sets.

What Types of Fonts Does GLOBE Support?

Use GLOBE technology to install international character sets on your printer. GLOBE technology is part of PrintSet, the Windows-based configuration program that came on the CD with your printer. You can use PrintSet to install these types of fonts: TrueType fonts Bitmap fonts generated from TrueType fonts using PrintSet TrueType fonts are scaleable fonts that retain smooth contours at any size. Since TrueType fonts may be very complex, they tend to image slower than bitmap fonts. You cannot subset a TrueType font. You must download the entire font to the printer.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

13

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

Note: When using TrueType fonts, your printer must be configured to operate in 8 bit mode. Intermec also recommends the following printer configuration: highest supported bits per second (Baud rate), 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, XON/XOFF flow control. Your TrueType fonts must be compatible with Microsoft Windows. To generate bitmap fonts from TrueType fonts for a particular language, you must run PrintSet under that language version of Microsoft Windows. You can run PrintSet Version 2.0 and higher under Windows 95/98/NT 4.0/2000/XP. Earlier versions of PrintSet will run under Windows 3.11. PrintSet 2.1 or higher is required to install a Chinese, Japanese, or Korean TrueType font. You must locate and install the necessary code page tables to use with these language fonts. For help, see Installing Code Page Tables later in this chapter. The EasyCoder F4 does not support bitmap or TrueType Chinese, Japanese, or Korean fonts.

Do You Need to Purchase Additional RAM?

If you wish to install a TrueType font in your printer, you must have enough memory available to contain the entire font file. The size of the TrueType font file, in bytes, is the minimum amount of memory you must have available in your printer. Bitmap fonts generated from TrueType files will vary in size, depending on the point size and number of characters you create. The larger the point size you choose, the larger the resulting file size. Chinese, Japanese, and Korean languages contain thousands of characters. If you wish to use these languages, you will need to purchase expanded flash memory to store them in your printer. The amount of memory depends on the size and number of fonts you wish to install. Use the next table to determine the approximate size of some Asian TrueType fonts. The approximate size is shown in dots per inch (dpi). Approximate Sizes Asian TrueType Fonts
TrueType Font Korean KSC-5601 Point Size 12 pt 16 pt 24 pt 12 pt 16 pt 12 pt 16 pt 12 pt 16 pt Approximate Size (400 dpi) 1.6MB 2.7MB 5.8MB 3.1MB 5.25MB 3.5MB 6.2MB 3.9MB 6.75MB Approximate Size (200 dpi) 0.5MB 0.8MB 1.5MB 0.9MB 1.6MB 1MB 1.8MB 1.1MB 2MB

Traditional Chinese Big 5 Simplified Chinese GB Japanese Shift-JIS

14

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

Some TrueType fonts require large amounts of dynamic RAM to operate. If you receive an error code 37 when printing a label using TrueType fonts, you may need to purchase expanded dynamic RAM.

Licensing Your Fonts

Although Intermec provides you with a tool to download international characters sets, you must license the fonts that you purchase and install in your printers. Contact your font vendor for licensing information. These companies resell TrueType fonts that work with Intermec printers: Precision Type 47 Mall Drive Commack, NY 11725 Tel: 1-800-248-3668 Fax: 516-543-5721 e-mail: [email protected] Galapagos Design Group 256 Great Road Suite 15 Littleton, MA 01360-1916 Tel: 978-952-6200 Fax: 978-952-6260 e-mail: [email protected]

These companies also provide TrueType fonts compatible with Intermec printers: Dynalab Inc. 2055 Gateway Place Suite 400 San Jose, CA 95110 Tel: 408-490-4224 Fax: 408-490-2233 www.dynalab.com Microsoft Corporation One Microsoft Way Redmond, WA 98052-6399 Tel: 425-882-8080 www.microsoft.com

Note: Dynalab Inc. provides Chinese, Japanese, and Korean fonts. You can also purchase fonts from their offices in Taiwan and Hong Kong. See the Dynalab web page for the address of these offices.

Creating Bitmap Fonts From TrueType Fonts

To create bitmap fonts from TrueType fonts, you must run PrintSet under the correct language version of Windows. For example, to create a Traditional Chinese font, you must run PrintSet under Traditional Chinese Microsoft Windows. In addition, you must install the font using Microsoft Windows in order for PrintSet to correctly convert it to a bitmap font. The advantage of bitmap fonts is that they may require less RAM and the printer can image them faster. When you download bitmap characters to the printer, you must select the size of the characters. Make sure that you select the size you want to use in your formats. If you magnify the character size in the printer, the edges of the characters will be jagged.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

15

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

Note: You can create Traditional or Simplified Chinese bitmap fonts up to a size of 16 points at 400 dpi or 32 points at 200 dpi. The EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, and PM4i do not support bitmapped Chinese, Japanese, or Korean fonts. To create bitmap fonts from TrueType fonts 1 Start PrintSet. 2 Make sure that the communications settings are correct. 3 From the Configuration menu, select Fonts or on the toolbar, click the Font Setup button. The Font Setup dialog box appears:

4 To select a font by font name, click Select Installed Font. Select the TrueType font name from the list of installed fonts. To select a font by pathname, click Select Font Path. Select a drive and a path. From the File name list box, select the TrueType font file (*TTF). 5 In the Storage Option box, click the Fixed option button. 6 In the Size Option box, click either the Point Size option button or the Height/Width option button. 7 If you select Point Size, in the Point Size list box, select the size of the bitmap characters. One point equals 1/72 of an inch. If you select Height/Width, in the Height box and Width box enter the height and width (in inches or centimeters) of the bitmap characters. Note: If you enter 0 for the width, you preserve the aspect ratio of the font.

16

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

8 In the Character Set list box, you may restrict the number of bitmap characters that you want created. Restricting the number of characters will create a smaller font that requires less memory and takes less time to install. If you are creating a Chinese, Japanese, or Korean font, you must select the language you are using. You can choose from these selections:
Japanese (Shift JIS) Traditional Chinese (BIG 5) Simplified Chinese (GB 2312) Korean (KSC 5601)

9 In the Location list box, choose the font number you wish to assign to the font. Intermec printers identify fonts by their font number. 10 Click the View tab. The selected font and the designated printer location appear in the fonts to send box. You may select additional fonts to add to local memory. Each font must have a unique location number.

Selecting the Printer Language

When you install a TrueType font, you must select the correct printer language. To choose the correct language, use the IPL command, Printer Language, Select. If the language setting you have chosen does not work, use the default language setting.

Installing Code Page Tables

If you install a Japanese, Chinese, or Korean TrueType font, you must also install the code page tables. See the Printer Language, Select command in Chapter 7 for a list of code pages. You can download code pages from Intermecs web site at www.intermec.com, and then from the Service & Support menu, choose Software Downloads. The files were compressed using Microsoft WinZip application and have the file extension .ZIP. After decompressing the file, install your code page as described in the procedure below. To install the code page tables in your printer 1 Copy the tables you wish to use to your PC: SJIS.PCF - Japanese (Shift JIS) BIG5.PCF - Traditional Chinese (Big 5) GB.PCF - Simplified Chinese (GB 2312) KSC.PCF - Korean (KSC5601)

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

17

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

2 Use Windows HyperTerminal to configure the PC to match the printer settings. When using double-byte fonts, the recommended printer configuration is COM 1, 19,200 bits per second, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and XON\XOFF flow control.
a Start HyperTerminal. (HyperTerminal is often located inside the

Accessories folder.) The Connection Description screen appears.

b In the Name field, enter a name for this connection (such as Printer)

and select an icon (optional). Click OK. The Connect To screen appears.
c In the Connect Using list box, select the appropriate port. Click OK.

The port properties screen appears.

d Enter data, matching the PCs settings to the printer settings. Click

OK. The HyperTerminal main menu appears.

e From the Transfer menu, select Send File. The Send File screen

appears.
f In the Name field, locate your file, and then click Send.

Using IPL Commands to Download Fonts

Although the easiest way to download fonts is with PrintSet, you can also use the IPL command set to create and download user-defined bitmap and outline fonts to your Intermec printer.

Downloading Bitmap Fonts

To learn more about bitmap font formats, see Creating User-Defined Bitmap Fonts in Appendix C.

Downloading Outline Fonts

If you need to download an outline font but you cannot use PrintSet, you can: create a program to convert the outline font to a format you can download to the printer. manually convert the outline font to a format you can download to the printer. When you convert an outline font to a format you can download to the printer, you must change the font character data into nibblized data that the printer can interpret. When you nibblize data, you divide each byte of data into two bytes. For example: byte 0xAB becomes two bytes: 0x41, 0x42 or text string AB

18

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

To manually download an outline font to your printer 1 Nibblize the font data. Divide the nibblized data into separate lines preceded by the j command. (See the Outline Font, Download command in Chapter 7.) Remember to wrap the entire line in <STX> and ;<ETX>. You need short lines for limited message length protocols and to make modifying easier by using an editor or word processing program. 2 Include IPL commands to instruct the printer what to do with the font data. For help, see the following example and Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference. 3 Send the commands to the printer using one of the methods described in Chapter 1. This is an example of a nibblized outline font file that includes IPL commands to send it directly to a printer. Nibblized Outline Font File Example
Command <STX>R<ESC>C<ESC>P<ETX> <STX>J03,Times,1;<ETX> <STX>j0001000000110100000400604c545348efe24cd00000;<ETX> <STX>j00ebf468646d78d956f5ab0001135800001508686561;<ETX> <STX>j0d2000012f04000006a3706f7374d43c8176000135a8;<ETX> : : : <STX>j00b3008200b0008725ba0000;<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> Definition Enter Program mode. Create TrueType font 3 and give it the name Times. TrueType data string. TrueType data string. TrueType data string. Several TrueType data strings not shown due to space constraints. Last TrueType data string. Exit Program mode.

Using Third-Party Software Applications to Download Fonts

Use your third-party software to download fonts into a user-defined font format that the printer can interpret. Refer to your third-party documentation for more information.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

19

Chapter 2 Downloading Fonts to the Printer

20

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Designing Bar Code Labels

This chapter explains how to design and print your own labels using IPL commands. It covers the basic elements of label design and provides examples to guide you in designing your own labels.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

21

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Introduction to Formats
To print a label on an Intermec printer, you must create a label format, send that format to the printer, send data to fill in the fields in the format, and then print the label. A format is a template that defines how the information prints on a label. For example, if you want to print a number on a label, the format must indicate the location of the number, its font and size, and whether the number has a vertical or horizontal orientation. You can define a format either by downloading IPL commands or by using a label generation program. The printer stores the format in its RAM or flash module. You can use the format at any time. You can call it up to print labels, or call it up in Program mode to modify one or more of its fields on the host. If you intend to regularly reload a format, you can use the temporary format parameter (*) with some printers. The use of format * results is an optimal use of flash-based storage memory because the printer stores it in RAM and deletes it when the printer power is turned off.

Tutorial for Designing and Creating a Label Format

Label formats are composed of several different fields that determine where and how different types of data appear in the label design. The fields on a label may differ in size, location, orientation, and data type. You must define information that you plan to print on the label as a field in the label format. Once you define the fields, you can pass data into the fields and print them. This tutorial assumes that you are using IPL commands. To design a basic label format 1 Using a label from your roll of media, sketch an example of a format that you want to create. Your format can include any or all of these fields:
Human-readable Bar code Line Box User-defined characters (UDCs) or graphics

In this example, you will design a simple label that includes a humanreadable field, a line field, and a bar code field.

22

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

2 Determine the placement of each field from the label origin. The label origin (o,) is the top left corner of the label.
To determine the horizontal or X origin of each field, measure the

distance from the left side of the label to the upper left corner of the field.
To determine the vertical or Y origin of each field, measure the

distance from the top of the label to the upper left corner of the field. Note: On the 4400 and 7421 printers, be sure to use the label width command to set the actual width of your labels; otherwise, the Y origins will be incorrect. When you combine the two numbers, they form the field origin oX,Y. In the illustration below, the horizontal or X origin of the humanreadable field measures 12.7 mm (0.5 in) from the left side of the label and the vertical or Y origin measures 6.35 mm (0.25 in) from the top of the label.
field origin = X, Y label origin = o, y Label motion from printer

0.25"

x 0.5"

THIS

3 Convert the measurements for the human-readable field from inches to dots. Use this equation: 25.4 mm (1 in) = 203 dots 1 mm = 16 dots In this example, the human-readable field origin in dots is: 12.7 mm (0.5 in) x 203 dots = 102 dots (X dimension) 6.35 mm (0.25 in) x 203 dots = 51 dots (Y dimension) The origin for the human-readable field is o102,51 (oX,Y).

IS THE SAMPLE LABEL

Code 39 label

IPL.002

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

23

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Note: If you have a 300 dpi or 406 dpi printer, substitute your dpi where you see 203 dots in these equations. 4 Convert the measurements for the line field and the bar code field to complete this example. To create or program the label format 1 Choose a bar code symbology and a human-readable font that suit your needs. For this example, you are going to use the proportional outline font and the Code 39 symbology. See Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference, for information on the different symbologies and fonts available to you. 2 Define the parameters for each type of field in the format.
Field Type in Label Human-readable Bar code Line Box User-defined characters (UDCs) or graphics Represented By H B L W U

See Commands Listed by Task in Chapter 6 for a list of the parameters you can define for each type of field. For example, you need to define the following parameters for a human-readable field:
Parameter Field type Field origin Font Field direction Height Width Field source and number of characters Value for this Example H0 o102,51 c25 (outline font) f0 (horizontal) h20 (multiplied 20 times) w20 (multiplied 20 times) d0,30

3 Create command strings for each type of field. You must bracket your field information between the start of text character (<STX>) and the end of text character (<ETX>). When you combine the parameters in the previous table into a command string, it should look like this:
<STX>H0;o102,51;c25;f0;h20;w20;d0,30;<ETX>

24

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

4 Combine the command strings you defined into one file and add the following commands bracketed by <STX> and <ETX>:
Command <ESC>C <ESC>P E4;F4; R <ESC>E4 <ETB> Description Selects Advanced mode Enters Program mode Erases what was in format 4 and creates a new format 4 Saves the format and exits to Print mode Accesses format 4 Prints the format

5 Create the data lines for the human-readable field and the bar code field. Do this by completing the following tasks:
a Type the information that you want to appear in the human-readable

field and the bar code field in two separate lines.

b Separate the information with a <CR> at the end of the first text

string. The <CR> tells the printer to enter the text into different fields. The first line will be the text for the human-readable field and so on.
c Preface the data lines with the <CAN> command. It erases all data in

the current format. Your command strings should look like this:
Command String <CAN> THIS IS THE SAMPLE LABEL<CR> SAMPLE Definition Erases all data in current format Text for the human-readable field Text for the bar code field

d Bracket the command strings between <STX> and <ETX>.

6 Combine all of the command strings into one format and it should look like the following example. Note: The difference between the lowercase letter l and the numeral 1 is not very noticeable in the Courier font. Make sure that you enter the correct command.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

25

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Sample Label Command Strings

Command <STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E4;F4;<ETX> <STX>H0;o102,51;f0;c25;h20;w20;d0,30;<ETX> <STX>L1;o102,102;f0;l575;w5;<ETX> <STX>B2;o203,153;c0,0;h100;w2;i1;d0,10;<ETX> <STX>I2;h1;w1;c20;<ETX> <STX>R;<ETX> <STX><ESC>E4<ETX> <STX><CAN><ETX> <STX>THIS IS THE SAMPLE LABEL<CR><ETX> <STX>SAMPLE<ETX> <STX><ETB><ETX> Definition Select Advanced mode Enter Program mode Erase format 4, create format 4 Edit/create human-readable field 0 Edit/create line field 1 Edit/create Code 39 bar code field 2 with interpretive field enabled Create interpretive field to go with bar code field 2 Save format and exit to Print mode Access format 4 Erase all data Data for human-readable field 0 Data for bar code field 2 Print

Note: The line breaks in the preceding example are shown for formatting purposes only and do not necessarily represent carriage returns. This format prints the label shown in the next illustration.

THIS IS THE SAMPLE LABEL

*SAMPLE*

IPL004.eps

26

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Defining Label Design Fields

Define each type of field to hold a certain type of data. You can define: Bar code fields (with or without interpretive fields) Human-readable fields Graphic fields Line fields Box fields You must define the data you plan to print on your label as a field in the label format. Each field type gives you options for interpreting your data. The fields that contain the most options are bar code fields and humanreadable fields.

Bar Code Fields

You can print bar codes in any of these symbologies: Codabar Code 2 of 5 Code 11 Code 16K Code 39 Code 49 Code 93 Code 128 Code One Data Matrix HIBC Interleaved 2 of 5 MaxiCode MicroPDF 417 QR Code PDF 417 POSTNET UPC/EAN

See Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference, for a complete list of commands to select the appropriate bar code symbology. Commands Listed by Task in Chapter 6 lists the command options available for editing bar code fields.

Human-Readable Fields
You can print human-readable fields in any one of the printers internal fonts or user-defined fonts. The printer contains several resident bitmap fonts in a range of sizes and styles. You can change the size of the font character by using the width and height magnification or by using the pitch or point-size commands. The fonts themselves remain unchanged. The font character charts in Appendix B, Character Sets, illustrate the complete character set for each font.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

27

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

The printer supports nine different international character sets for each command set mode. In Emulation mode, the international character substitution is compatible with Intermec 8636/8646 printers. In Advanced mode, the substitution complies with the ISO standards. The printer may also contain character sets for IBM translation and code pages. The internal bitmap fonts of the printer include: Standard bitmap fonts measured in dots Bitmap fonts recognized by optical character recognition (OCR) programs Bitmap fonts measured in point sizes Outline fonts Bitmap monospaced fonts

Line and Box Fields

Use the command set (see Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference) to define line or box fields on a label. You can use the commands to determine whether a box or line appears vertically or horizontally and to set the line length and thickness. The following example uses vertical and horizontal lines to separate fields on a label and uses a box field to make a label border. This format uses bold text to highlight the lines that contain line or box fields. This label format prints the label shown on the next page.

28

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Lines and Boxes Format

<STX><ESC>C0<ETX> <STX><ESC>P;<ETX> <STX>E4;F4,DEMO 4;<ETX> <STX>L1;o11,447;f0;l1207;w4;<ETX> <STX>L2;o11,285;f0;l1207;w4;<ETX> <STX>W3;o11,0;f0;l1207;h802;w4;<ETX> <STX>B4;o658,650;f0;h102;w2;c0,0;i1;r1;d0,11;<ETX> <STX>I4;o658,752;f0;h1;w1;c20;r0;b0;<ETX> <STX>B5;o87,650;f0;h102;w2;c0,0;i1;r1;d0,11;<ETX> <STX>I5;o87,752;f0;h1;w1;c20;r0;b0;<ETX> <STX>H6;o34,183;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,17;<ETX> <STX>H7;o35,143;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,BASIS WT. 39-4838;<ETX> <STX>H8;o389,305;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,ROLLS;<ETX> <STX>H9;o40,305;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,ROLL WIDTH;<ETX> <STX>L10;o11,609;f0;l1207;w4;<ETX> <STX>H12;o1022,508;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,7;<ETX> <STX>H13;o1022,467;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,WEIGHT;<ETX> <STX>H14;o539,508;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,11;<ETX> <STX>H15;o539,467;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,LOCATION;<ETX> <STX>H16;o42,508;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,15;<ETX> <STX>H17;o43,467;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER;<ETX> <STX>H18;o840,346;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,13;<ETX> <STX>H19;o840,305;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,ORDER ITEM NUMBER;<ETX> <STX>H20;o389,346;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,7;<ETX> <STX>H21;o34,346;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,11;<ETX> <STX>H22;o747,183;f0;h1;w1;c22;r0;b0;d0,15;<ETX> <STX>H23;o743,143;f0;h1;w1;c21;r0;b0;d3,GRADE DESCRIPTION;<ETX> <STX>H24;o13,0;f0;h51;w34;c25;r0;b3;d3, SHIPPING LABEL <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>E4<CAN><ETX> <STX><ESC>F4<LF>INTERMEC<ETX> <STX><ESC>F5<LF>372181192<ETX> <STX><ESC>F6<LF>38448379237<ETX> <STX><ESC>F12<LF>230<ETX> <STX><ESC>F14<LF>3839494<ETX> <STX><ESC>F16<LF>372181192<ETX> <STX><ESC>F18<LF>234-LOFT<ETX> <STX><ESC>F20<LF>12<ETX> <STX><ESC>F21<LF>338438<ETX> <STX><ESC>F22<LF>A-PLUS QTY<ETX> <STX><ETB><FF><ETX>

;<ETX>

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

29

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

SHIPPING LABEL
BASIS WT. 39-4838 GRADE DESCRIPTION

38448379237
ROLL WIDTH ROLLS

A - PLUS QTY
ORDER ITEM NUMBER

338438
CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER

12

234 - LOFT
WEIGHT

LOCATION

372181192
INTERMEC

3839494
372181192

230

IPL006.eps

Sample label in lines and boxes format: This illustration shows the label printed using the command strings on the previous page.

Graphic Fields
You must define a graphic field if you want to print a graphic image on a label. Before you can use this field, you need to download the graphic to the printer. Once you download the graphic, you can use it in any format. Use the PrintSet printer installation software to easily download graphics to the printer. PrintSet automatically converts the graphic into a six bits per byte format that your printer can understand. If you are using third-party label-generation software, it converts your graphic file to a UDC format that the printer can interpret and downloads it to the printer. If you want to design your own graphic, refer to Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics in Appendix C. You must send graphics as either one bit per byte or six bits per byte bitmap images. The maximum size that you can define a graphic to be is limited by the capacity of your printer. Due to message length constraints, you must design large graphics in the six bits per byte format. You can use Direct Graphics mode to reduce the time it takes to download and print an image. For more information on direct graphics, see Appendix E, Using Direct Graphics Mode.

30

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Editing Label Formats and Working With Fields

In addition to understanding the different types of printable fields on the printer, you need to know how to arrange them to define or change the format of a label. The following sections use examples to describe the commands that position, size, rotate, and edit label fields. For a complete list of all programming commands, see Chapter 6, Finding IPL Commands in This Manual. Whenever you create a format, the printer automatically creates a humanreadable field zero (H0) along with it. The printer creates the H0 field with all field parameters set to the default setting. You can only delete field zero after you create one or more other fields. You cannot delete the last field in a format. Defaults for the H0 Field
Command o0,0; f0; h1; w1; c2; b0; r0; d0,30; Definition Field origin is 0,0. Field direction is horizontal with respect to the label motion from printer. Field height magnification is one. Field width magnification is one. Selects the 10 x 14 standard font. Selects no border around human-readable field. Selects horizontal orientation of characters. You enter variable data in Print mode. The maximum number of characters you can enter into this field is 30.

When creating a new format field, it is not possible to specify field zero as anything other than human-readable field zero (H0) without creating another field first. For example, you cannot make field zero a bar code field by doing the following:
<STX><ESC>P;E1;F1;B0;<ETX>

To make field zero a bar code field, you have to delete human-readable field 0 and then define bar code field 0. To do this, you must create a temporary field (L39) before you delete human-readable field zero (H0):
<STX><ESC>P;E1;F1;L39;D0;B0;D39;<ETX>

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

31

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

The next table describes each command in the string. Label Format Editing Command Examples
Command <ESC>P; E1; F1; L39; D0; B0; D39; Definition Enters Program mode Erases format 1 Creates format 1 Creates line field (temporary field) Deletes field zero Creates bar code field zero Deletes the temporary line field

When numbering the fields in a format, it is important to remember to give every field a different number. Never use a field number more than once. You can have up to 200 fields numbering from 0 to 199. The importance of field numbering comes into play when you are in Print mode and are entering data into the label format. At this point, you can only identify the fields by a number, not by the type of field. Each bar code field can have an interpretive field associated with it. For example, bar code field B33 would have an interpretive field I33. All interpretive fields use up a field location, starting from the top of the field directory; if B33 is the first bar code field with interpretive text, then field I33 would use location 199. You can see how the printer uses the fields internally by uploading the format and examining where the interpretives appear. For help, see the Format, Transmit command in Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference. If you need to use more fields than IPL can accommodate in a single format (because of interpretive fields), you can use pages to combine several formats on one label. Also keep in mind that you enter data into fields according to their numeric value if you use a <CR> to separate the data. In other words, the first string of data you enter goes into the lowest numbered field, the second string of data you enter goes into the next lowest numbered field, and so on.

32

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Editing Existing Fields

If you make a mistake in a label format, you may not have to download the entire format again depending on the severity of the mistake. You can change a specific field in a format by sending a command in Program mode. You can modify just the incorrect format fields instead of having to download the entire format again. When the printer is in Program mode, it uses a field pointer to point to the field to be modified. The pointer continues to point to the most recently selected field until you select a different format or field. For the next example, assume that you used the following format: Sample Format
Command <STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E3;F3;<ETX> <STX>H0;o80,100;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX> <STX>H1;o80,120;f0;c0;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX> <STX>H2;o80,150;f0;c2;d0,14;h1;w1;<ETX> <STX>H3;o80,190;f0;c2;d0,16;h1;w1;<ETX> <STX>B4;o80,0;f0;c0,1;h50;w1;d0,11;i0;p@;<ETX> <STX>R;<ETX> Description Selects Advanced mode Enters Program mode Erases format 3, Creates format 3 Creates field H0 Creates field H1 Creates field H2 Creates field H3 Creates field B3 Saves and exits to Print mode

To change the height and width of field 3 to 2 dots, download this command string:
<STX><ESC>P;F3;H3;h2;w2;R;<ETX>

The following table describes each command in this string: Field Editing Commands in the Sample Format
Command <ESC>P; F3; H3; h2; w2; R; Description Enters Program mode Accesses format number 3 from memory Accesses field 3 Sets the height to 2 dots Sets the width to 2 dots Returns to Print mode

Note: The <STX> and <ETX> commands mark the beginning and end of a message. The semicolon (;) is the command terminator. Except for the last command in a message, all commands in Program mode must end with this terminator.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

33

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Deleting Fields
It is possible to delete any field from a format except for the last field. Use the following command string to delete field 3 from format 4.
<STX><ESC>P;F4;D3;R;<ETX>

The following table describes each command in this string: Command String Descriptions
Command <ESC>P; F4; D3; R; Description Enters Program mode Accesses format 4 Deletes field 3 Returns to Print mode

Positioning Fields
Using the IPL command language to position fields is the trickiest part of designing labels. Since you cannot tell exactly how the field looks until it prints, you may need to make several test prints before you get the field positioned correctly. For all types of fields, determine the print position by defining the coordinates of the upper left corner of the unrotated field. The field origin is the upper left corner of an unrotated field. To define the coordinates of the field origin, use the origin command (oX,Y) where o is the command that specifies origin, X is the distance from the left side of the label, and Y is the distance from the top of the label. Note: On the 4400 and 7421 printers, be sure to use the label width command to set the printer for the correct label width; otherwise, the Y origins will be incorrect. The X and Y coordinates of the field origin use dots as their form of measurement. There are 203 dots per inch or 8 dots per millimeter. Note: The 3400e with 400 dots per inch, 3240, and 3440 printers have 406 dots per inch or 16 dots per mm. The 4X30 printers have 300 dots per inch or 12 dots per mm.

34

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

To position a field to print approximately 0.25 inch from the left side and 0.5 inch from the top of your label, the origin command is o51,102.
D A HR Field B
*BC FIELD*

Second HR Field

*BCFIELD*

C
A = o51, 102 B = o51, 203 C = o51, 305 D = o355, 102

IPL007.eps

Field positioning: This illustration shows the relative positions of four fields with different origin points.

Note: If you are operating your printer in Emulation mode, the dot sizes are doubled (101 dots per inch or 4 dots per mm), so the origin for 1 inch from the top of the label and 0.5 inch from the left side is o25,51.

Rotating Fields
You can rotate any type of printable field in increments of 90 degrees counterclockwise around the field origin. To position a rotated field, you should keep in mind that the field origin remains on the corner where it was before you rotated the field. If you rotate a field 90 degrees counterclockwise, the origin that was at the upper left corner is now at the lower left corner. Use the Field Direction command fn to define the field rotation. See Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference, for more information. To rotate a field 90 degrees, you must position the lower left corner of the rotated field. To rotate a field 180 degrees, you must position the lower right corner of the rotated field. To rotate a field 270 degrees, you must position the upper right corner of the rotated field.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

35

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

f1(rotated 90 degrees)

ABCDE

f2 (rotated 180 degrees)

Field rotation: This illustration shows the effects of rotating a field by using the Field Direction command.

Scaling Fields
You can determine the size of a field by the font or graphic you use and the field magnification factors you apply. The human-readable fonts and bar code symbologies have default sizes, and the user-defined character fields print as large as you design them (up to the maximum), but you can scale each of these fields even further by using magnification commands.

Magnifying Fonts and Character Fields

The internal fonts in the printer already have sizes associated with them. For example, the letters in font c0 are 7 dots wide by 9 dots high, with a 1-dot gap between characters. If you design a field that prints 10 letters in font c0, the field will be 79 dots wide by 9 dots high. By applying magnification factors (h for height and w for width), you can increase a fields height or width. If you increase the height to 2 (h2) for the field described above, the field height doubles, and the final field prints 79 dots long by 18 dots high. If you change the height magnification to h3, the field height triples, and the field prints 79 dots by 27 dots. The default human-readable field H0 prints the 7 x 9 font as follows (assuming you enter the word example as data):

36

ABCDE
ABCDE

ABCDE
f0 (horizontal)

Field origin

f3 (rotated 270 degrees)

IPL.008

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

When you apply a magnification factor of 3 to human-readable field H0, the font now prints the image below:

Increasing the width of a text field to 2 makes each letter in the field twice as wide. If you did this to the example above, with field height h2, the final field would print 158 dots wide by 18 dots high. When you magnify a bitmap font, the edges of the characters become jagged. If you want to print large text characters (greater than 1 inch or 2.54 cm), use an outline font such as c25 (Swiss Mono 721 standard outline font).

Magnifying Bar Code Fields

You can also use height and width commands to modify bar code fields, but the commands do not behave the same as with human-readable fields. For bar code fields, the height magnification is the actual dot height of the bar code. If you choose a height magnification of h20, the height of the bar code field will be 20 dots. Printing narrow bar codes conserves space on each label as well as media; however, if you plan to scan bar codes from a distance, you may need to magnify the bar code widths. The width magnification factor for bar code fields refers to the width of the narrowest element of the bar code. When you specify a narrow element width of w3, the width of the narrowest element in the symbology is 3 dots wide. The spaces and large element widths grow according to preset ratios for each symbology. Note: You can only print a bar width of 1 if you are printing in drag mode (bars perpendicular to the print head). If you select a width of 1 in picket mode (bars parallel to the print head), the printer defaults to 2. The default height for bar code fields is 50 dots, and the default width for narrow elements is 1 dot. Note: If you are using the POSTNET symbology, follow the rules for magnifying fonts.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

37

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Designing Pages
A page is a collection of one or more formats that you combine to print at the same time. This feature is helpful when you need to print several different labels for an application at once. For example, you may need to attach one type of label to a product and a different type of label to its container. With the page printing capability, you can print both labels at the same time. Because you can print pages of several formats at once, you can also print labels on media rolls that have different sizes and shapes of labels already precut. When you group label formats into a page, you assign the formats to positions designated by the letters a through z. You can print the formats used in pages independent of each other. The next example shows how to create a page that contains five different formats.

Label Format Example

The format example on this page is a complex label designed to demonstrate the different types of data that you can print with your printer. This example contains human-readable fields, a bar code field, line fields, a box field, and a graphic field (the diamond).

Cat. No. S i z e

432-3221

Std. Qty.

100

13 4
Lot 23455 262948

- For Flexible Steel Conduit and .375" - .625" Diameter Armored and Nonmetallic Sheath Cables - For Smooth or Interlocking Sheath Metal Clad Cables .375" - .675" Dia. (UL only)

DUPLEX ANGLE CONNECTOR

*30791751*
*307 91747*

ACE CORP.
ADDRESS 3010 FICTION USA

IPL011.eps

Complex label: This illustration shows a label that includes human-readable, box, bar code, line, and graphic fields.

38

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Graphic for Example

Download the six bits per byte diamond graphic explained in Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Graphics in Appendix C.

Format for Example

<STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E5;F5;<ETX> <STX>H0;o35,40;c25;d3,Cat.;k12;<ETX> <STX>H1;o35,70;c25;d3,No.;k12;<ETX> <STX>H2;o165,0;c25;d3,432-3221;k36;<ETX> <STX>H3;o785,40;c25;d3,Std.;k12;<ETX> <STX>H4;o785,70;c25;d3,Qty.;k12;<ETX> <STX>H5;o915,0;c25;d3,100;k36;<ETX> <STX>L6;o740,10;f3;l130;w8;<ETX> <STX>L7;o25,140;l1130;w8;<ETX> <STX>H8;o30,165;c25;f3;r1;d3,Size;k12;<ETX> <STX>H9;o80,170;c25;d3,1 ;k30;<ETX> <STX>H10;o150,165;f3;r1;c25;d3,3/4;h3;w7;<ETX> <STX>L11;o300,140;f3;l130;w8;<ETX> <STX>L12;o25,270;l275;w8;<ETX> <STX>H13;o60,560;f1;c25;d0,20;h3;w2;<ETX> <STX>L14;o140,270;f3;l310;w8;<ETX> <STX>H15;o360,120;c22;d3,DUPLEX ANGLE CONNECTOR;h3;w1;<ETX> <STX>H16;o170,320;c25;d3,- For Flexible Steel Conduit and .375 .625;k12;<ETX> <STX>H17;o212,375;c25;d3,Diameter Armored and Nonmetallic Sheath Cables;k12;<ETX> <STX>H18;o170,450;c25;d3,- For Smooth or Interlocking Sheath Metal Clad;k12;<ETX> <STX>H19;o212,505;c25;d3,Cables .375 - .675 Dia. (UL only);k12;<ETX> <STX>L20;o25,580;l1130;w8;<ETX> <STX>U21;o40,610;c2;h9;w9;<ETX> <STX>H22;o210,600;c25;d3,ACE CORP.;k24;<ETX> <STX>H23;o210,670;c25;d3,ADDRESS 3010;k12;<ETX> <STX>H24;o210,710;c25;d3,FICTION USA;k12;<ETX> <STX>B25;o685,615;c0,0;d0,20;i1;h100;p@;<ETX> <STX>I25;h2;w2;<ETX> <STX>L26;o590,580;f3;l185;w8;<ETX> <STX>W27;o015,000;w10;l1150;h775;<ETX> <STX>R<ETX>

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

39

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Data for Example

<STX><ESC>E5<CAN><ETX> <STX>Lot 23455 262948<CR><FS>307 91747<FS><ESC>I2<ETX> <STX><RS>5<ETB><ETX>

Use the <ETX> and <STX> characters to mark the beginning and end of the command strings. The other characters are explained in the following table. Most of the printer command lines explained below contain commands previously not discussed in this chapter. Refer to previous examples for clarification of the lines that are not explained, or see Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference, for a further explanation of the command language. Label Format Example Command Descriptions
Command <ESC>C <ESC>P E5;F5; H0; o35,40; c25; d3,Cat.; k12; L6; o740,10; f3; l1300; w8; H8; o30,165; c25; f3; r1; d3,Size; k12; H10; o150,165; f3; r1; c25; d3,3/4; k12; Description Selects Advanced mode. Selects Program mode. Erases anything previously stored as format five and accesses the location for format five. Defines field 0 as a human-readable field. Sets the origin of field 0 at coordinates (35,40). Sets the font for field 0 to font 25.z Sets the data for field 0 to have the constant value: Cat. Sets the point size to 12. Defines field 6 as a line field. Sets the origin for field 6 at (740,10). Rotates field 6 by 270 degrees counterclockwise around the field origin. Sets the length of the line in field 6 to 130 dots. Sets the width of field 6 to 8 dots. Defines field 8 as a human-readable field. Sets the origin of field 8 at (30,165). Defines the font for field 8 as font 25. Rotates field 8 by 270 degrees counterclockwise around the origin. Rotates the characters in field 8 by 90 degrees counterclockwise. Defines the constant data for field 8. Sets the point size to 12. Defines field 10 as a human-readable field. Sets the origin for field 10 at (150,165). Rotates field 10 by 270 degrees counterclockwise around the origin. Rotates the characters in field 10 by 90 degrees counterclockwise. Sets the font for field 10 to font 25. Defines constant data for field 10. Sets the point size to 12.

40

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

Label Format Example Command Descriptions (continued)

Command H13; o60,560; f1; c25; d0,20; k10; U21; o40,610; c2; h9; w9; B25; o685,615; c0,0; d0,20; i1; h100; p@; I25 h2 w2 W27; o015,000; w10; l1150; h775; R <ESC>E5 <CAN> Lot 23455 262948<CR> <FS> 307 91747 <FS> <ESC>I2 <RS>5 <ETB> Description Defines field 13 as a human-readable field. Sets the origin of field 13 at (60,560). Rotates field 13 by 90 degrees around the origin. Determines that field 13 prints in font 25. Specifies that data for field 13 will be entered during Print mode and that the data will be a maximum of 20 characters long. Sets the point size to 10. Defines field 21 as a graphic field. Sets the origin of field 21 at (40,610). Determines that field 21 prints in font two. Sets the height to nine times the original size. Sets the width to 9 dots. Defines field 25 as a bar code field. Sets the origin of field 25 at (685,615). Sets the bar code font to Code 39 with no check digit. Determines that the data for field 25 is entered during Print mode and its maximum length is 20 characters. Determines that an interpretation of the bar code prints with start and stop characters included. Determines that the bar code height is 100 dots. Clears all prefixes from the bar code field. Edits the interpretive field for bar code field 25. Sets the height of the interpretive field to twice its original height. Sets the width of the interpretive field to 2 dots. Defines field 27 as a box field. Sets the origin of field 27 at 15,0. Defines the line width of the box as 10 dots. Defines the length of the box as 1150. Sets the height of the box to 775. Sets the printer in Print mode. Accesses format 5 from the printer memory. Clears all host-entered data for the current format and sets the field pointer to the lowest numbered data-entry field. This is the data intended for the first data-entry field. <CR> instructs the printer to go to the next data-entry field. Specifies that the following data is to be incremented. This is the data intended for the next data-entry field (specified as data to be incremented). Specifies that the preceding data is to be incremented. The data surrounded by <FS> commands is to be incremented by a value of 2 after each label is printed. Sets the number of labels to print when the print command is executed. Tells the printer to print the label.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

41

Chapter 3 Designing Bar Code Labels

42

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Troubleshooting

This chapter describes the problems that may occur as a result of using IPL commands incorrectly. If you do not find your problem listed here, see the troubleshooting information in your printer users manual.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

43

Chapter 4 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting Checklist
Even though Intermec designed your printer to operate under harsh conditions, you may still encounter error messages. You can easily fix most of the errors you encounter and consequently not delay operation of the printer for very long. If you receive an error message or encounter a functional problem with the printer, you should perform these steps: To troubleshoot your printer 1 Send a <BEL> command to the printer and see if the printer sends an error message to the host in response. 2 If there is an error message, find it in the section called Interpreting Error Codes and Solving Problems, later in this chapter. Follow the instructions in the table to correct the problem. Or: If the printer does not send an error message to the host, try to locate the symptom in the Printer Operation Problems and Print Quality Problems sections of the printer users manual. Follow the instructions in the manual to correct the problem. 3 Clean the printer components and check all connections. See your users manual for instructions. 4 If the problem persists, contact Intermec Technical Support (1-800755-5505) in North America. If you are an international customer, contact your local Intermec representative.

How the Printer Handles Error Conditions

This section describes how the printer handles error conditions that may occur while you use IPL commands.

Syntax Errors
The printer responds to syntax errors in the messages it receives from the host by attempting to execute the commands. It does not ignore a command with a syntax error; instead, the printer produces output, even if it is wrong. This output helps determine what went wrong and what should be done to correct the problem.

44

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 4 Troubleshooting

Parameter Errors
Certain commands require optional parameters. If you do not supply these parameters, the printer substitutes default values. If a parameter is above its maximum range limit, the printer uses the maximum value. If it falls below the minimum range, the printer uses the minimum value. See Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference, for the range and default value for each command.

Image Overrun Errors

Image overrun occurs when a label is too complex to image for a given print speed. An overrun will cause the printer to abort the label being printed. This error is most common on labels over 12.7 cm (5 in) long. The printer automatically attempts to correct for this error condition by resetting to the lowest print speed and to the highest number of image bands, then repeats printing the label. The printer remains at this setting until you reset it. If an image overrun still occurs, printing for that batch of labels stops and the printer executes any following commands. Note: Installing optional memory expansion may decrease image overrun errors.

Invalid Numeric Character Errors

If you include non-numeric characters within a numeric data string in a command, the printer ignores them and continues to process the rest of the valid numeric characters. If a non-numeric character begins the numeric data string, however, the printer uses a default value for the affected command. Here are two examples of valid numeric character strings and one example of an invalid string: 12a valid 1a2 valid a12 invalid

Insufficient Storage Memory Errors

Before storing new formats, graphics, or user-defined fonts in the static RAM or flash, the printer ensures that it has sufficient memory to store them. If there is insufficient memory, the printer ignores the last editing session. The printer preserves the existing data in the storage memory.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

45

Chapter 4 Troubleshooting

Interpreting Error Codes and Solving Problems

Most of the problems you may encounter cause the printer to send an error code to the host. To correct the error, find the error code in the following table and complete the instructions in the solution column. Error Codes and Possible Solutions
Error Code 00 02 06 07 Description of Problem No error. Invalid number of bar code characters (UPC/EAN). Invalid supplemental character count (UPC/EAN). More than one supplemental delimiter (UPC/EAN). Invalid bar code data. Data count exceeded. Entering data in non-data entry field. Quantity or batch count out of range. Field increment/decrement out of range. Intercharacter/message delay out of range. Missing preamble/postamble data. Invalid format transmission syntax. Solution No action is necessary. Verify the number of bar code characters used in the Bar Code, Select Type command. Make sure that the supplemental data consists of either two or five characters. Make sure that you have only one supplemental delimiter (.) between the bar code data and the supplemental data. Verify data in the label format. Data count should not exceed what is specified for the field. Check the field for accuracy. Quantity of labels or number of batches should be between 1 and 9999. Quantity should be between 1 and 9999. Delay should be between 0 and 9999. Change the configuration command to no preamble/postamble or include preamble/postamble data. Check the Format, Transmit command syntax. The correct syntax is <ESC>xn with n ranging from 0 to 19 on most printers. On some printers, such as the 3440, n ranges from 0 to 99. For more information, see the Format, Transmit command in Chapter 7. Check the Page, Transmit command syntax. The correct syntax is <ESC>yn with n ranging from 0 to 9. Check the Font, Transmit command syntax. The correct syntax is <ESC>vn. Values for n vary depending on your printer model. For more information, see the Font, Transmit command in Chapter 7. Check the User-Defined Characters, Transmit command syntax. The correct syntax is <ESC>un with n ranging from 0 to 99.

11 12 13 21 22 23 24 25

26 27

Invalid page transmission syntax. Invalid font transmission syntax.

28

Invalid UDC transmission syntax.

46

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 4 Troubleshooting

Error Codes and Possible Solutions (continued)

Error Code 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 41 42 Description of Problem Non-immediate command or data received after buffer full. Invalid field delimiters. Invalid escape command. Invalid data shift command. Invalid or undefined format number. Insufficient room in RAM to print format. Invalid or undefined field number. Syntax error for program commands. Insufficient room in RAM to store format. Solution Allow the printer to empty the buffer contents before sending commands or data. Check for all pairs of field delimiters and make sure both are numeric, or both are alphanumeric. Correct the escape command syntax. Correct the shift command syntax. Verify that the format numbers are between 0 and 19. Reduce the number of data fields in the format or add more DRAM. Verify the field number in the label format. Check the program command for proper syntax. Empty the buffer contents. If the format still does not fit, delete some fields or other data from the format. You may have to remove or reduce the UDCs, formats, or fonts if necessary. Note: Entering <ESC>m tells the host how much memory is installed and how much is available. 43 Too many fields in label format. You can use up to 200 fields in a format and each field can use up to 250 characters. Reduce field size or delete some fields. Check the statement syntax. Verify that the UDC/UDF bitmap cell height/width or intercharacter space is within the specified values for n. For more information, see the Bitmap Cell Height/Width for Graphic or UDF, Define or the Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define command in Chapter 7. Remove or reduce formats, fonts, or UDCs. Correct the UDC command syntax.

46 52

Undefined statement. Invalid UDC/UDF bitmap cell height/width or intercharacter space.

53 54

Insufficient room in RAM to store UDC or UDF. Invalid UDC command syntax.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

47

Chapter 4 Troubleshooting

48

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Advanced Printer Programming

This chapter discusses topics for advanced IPL programmers, such as using printer memory efficiently, increasing throughput, and using Emulation mode.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

49

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

Using the Printer Memory Efficiently

To receive the best performance from your printer, you must understand how to use the printer RAM efficiently. In general, if you use a significant amount of available memory for storage, you reduce the amount of memory used for imaging, which decreases printer performance.

How Is the Printer Storage Memory Used?

Although the printer contains enough static RAM or flash to store several different label formats, downloaded fonts, graphics, and data, you should be careful of how you use your printer memory. Printers use either static RAM or flash memory for storing tables, pages, formats, fonts, and user-defined characters (UDCs). Any storage memory that you are not using for storage is available for imaging. Some printers allow you to use PrintSet to adjust the amount of storage memory available for storage purposes. If you require additional storage memory, you can purchase a memory expansion option.

Making the Most of Your Storage Memory

There are limits to the number of formats, fonts, graphics, or pages that you can store in the printer. You can define up to 16 fonts, but there may not be enough room depending on the amount of memory being used for other purposes. The more formats, graphics, and fonts you store, the less memory is available. When you encounter a memory usage problem, use PrintSet to see how much memory is available. You must upload the memory information from the printer first. Refer to the PrintSet online help for more information. You can increase your available memory by following one of these suggestions: In some printers, you can adjust the amount of RAM allocated for storage purposes. For help, see the PrintSet software or the Amount of Storage, Define command in Chapter 7. Increase the amount of available memory by using the Memory Reset portion of the Test and Service menu. You can use the Memory Reset command to erase all or part of the information that you have downloaded to the printer. For help, see your users manual. Delete any unneeded user-defined fonts, graphics, pages, or formats. For help, see the PrintSet software or the specific commands in Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference.

50

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

Purchase additional memory. Please contact your Intermec representative for information on purchasing additional memory for your printer model.

Increasing Throughput
Note: This section does not apply to the EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, or PM4i. To print labels as quickly as possible, you must adjust the print speed in conjunction with the number of image bands (one image band equals 2.54 cm (1 in) of label). The print speed and image band settings determine the rate at which the printer processes the images of your labels, which affects the throughput of the entire printing process. When the printer receives the command to select a format, <ESC>E, it immediately begins imaging the label; as a result, the imaging process is better able to keep up with the print speed and throughput improves. If the number of image bands is too low, however, the imaging process is unable to keep up with the print speed, and the printer stops printing and restarts at the lowest print speed with the maximum number of image bands. If the image band command is set too high, the printer spends more time than necessary imaging, and label production is slowed.

What Is an Image Band?

An image band is a section of memory where a picture of a label format is drawn. This drawing process is known as imaging. Once the picture is imaged, the printer loads the picture from the image bands to the printhead for printing. Each image band is equal to 2.54 cm (1 in) of length of the label format. The number of image bands you use may be less than the length of the label being printed. The number of image bands (in inches) does not have to equal the length of the label since the printer recycles the image bands. Once the contents of an image band have been printed, it may be reused to image the next section of the label. Keep in mind that the more complex the label, the longer it will take to image each section, thus requiring a slower print speed. To use a higher print speed, use more image bands to allow more of the imaging process to complete before printing begins. It is possible to reduce the amount of time necessary to download and image a graphic by using Direct Graphics mode. In Direct Graphics mode, the printer images a graphic directly into the image bands without storing it in the printer. For help, see Appendix E, Using Direct Graphics Mode.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

51

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

How the Image Bands Command Works

The Number of Image Bands, Select command controls the amount of memory allotted to the imaging process. When you increase the image band adjustment to a higher number, you are adding more buffers to the imaging memory. As a result, more of the label format is imaged before printing begins. The minimum number of required image bands is dependent upon the print speed and the complexity of the label. Labels that contain numerous fields with different rotations, graphics, or combinations of any number of these formatting options may require a higher number of image bands. To set the number of image bands, use PrintSet or the Number of Image Bands, Set (<SI>I) IPL command. For help, see the PrintSet online help or the Number of Image Bands, Set (<SI>I) command in Chapter 7.

Optimizing Print Speed and Image Band Setting

The minimum number of image bands available is two. The maximum number of image bands varies between printer models. Use PrintSet to check for the maximum number of image bands available, or see the Number of Image Bands, Set (<SI>I) command in Chapter 7. To optimize the number of image bands for your print speed 1 Set the image band setting at the lowest number (2). 2 Print a label at the desired speed. If the label prints, the image band setting is optimal. You do not need to perform any more adjustments. If the number of image bands is too low, the printer aborts the label before printing is completed and attempts to reprint the label at the slowest speed (2 ips) with the highest number of image bands. Continue with Step 3. 3 Return to the original print speed and increase the original number of image bands one at a time. Continue to increase the number of image bands until the printer prints a label correctly. If the printer still aborts and reprints at the highest image band setting, you may be trying to optimize at a print speed that is too high for your label format. Try optimizing the number of image bands at a lower print speed, or add expansion RAM.

52

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

To print very complex labels at high speeds, you must allocate enough image bands to completely image the label before printing. By allocating one band for each 2.54 cm (1 in) of label length, you can print at any speed; however, you may notice considerable delays before each label is printed.

Image Band Example

This example shows how the printer prints a label format using image bands. The label is 12.7 cm (5 in) long and is divided into five image bands. The printer is configured for three image bands, which means that three bands will be imaged before printing begins. The dashed lines represent the divisions between the five image bands, and the arrow () represents the portion of the image band that is being printed at that time.

IPL.012

The diagram below shows the first 2.54 cm (1 in) of the label imaged into the first image band. The other two image bands are still empty. Printing has not started.

IPL.013

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

53

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

The second 2.54 cm (1 in) section of the label is imaged into the second image band. Printing still has not started.

IPL.014

The third 2.54 cm (1 in) section of the label is imaged into the third image band. Printing begins from the first image band, as indicated by the arrow. At this point, all three available image bands have been filled. The first band will be reused after it has been completely printed.

IPL.015

When the first image band is emptied (printed), the fourth band is imaged into it. Printing continues from the second image band. As before, this band must be emptied before the final band can be imaged into it.

IPL.016

The final section of the label is imaged into the second image band. Printing continues from the third band. At this point, the label has been completely imaged, but not printed.

54

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

IPL.017

Imaging of a second label could begin in the third image band while the first label is still printing. The second label could begin printing immediately after the first with no delay, which suggests that the only print delay encountered would be during the time when the first bands of the first label were imaged. As labels become more complex, the influence that print speed and the number of buffers has on throughput is limited by imaging speed. You will encounter new considerations, such as delay between printing and perceived printer performance. Unfortunately, no formula exists to calculate an ideal configuration; instead, you will have to find it through trial and error.

Reimaging Modified Fields

You can now choose to reimage only the fields in a label format that you modify instead of reimaging the entire label format. If you are updating data in only a few simple fields, it might be faster to use the modified field reimaging command; however, you need to take into account the type of fields you will be reimaging. If you choose to reimage a field that takes longer to erase and reimage than it takes an entire label format to erase and reimage, you will not be increasing throughput. Erasing a field requires reimaging it with zeros and erasing a label requires only clearing the RAM. When you use it correctly, this command parameter can greatly increase the throughput of your printer. To use the modified field reimaging command 1 Make sure that you select enough image bands to allow the printer to retain the entire label image. One image band is equal to 2.54 cm (1 in) of label length. 2 Select the fields to reimage by using the following command:
<ESC>En,m

See the Format, Select command in Chapter 7 for more information about reimaging modified fields.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

55

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

Optimizing Image Bands for Batch Printing

If you frequently print batches of identical labels (using the <US> command) or print a quantity of identical labels, you may want to optimize the number of image bands for batch printing. Optimizing the number of image bands for batch printing is especially helpful if you experience delays between the printing of each label. To optimize the number of image bands for batch printing, you must select enough image memory to allow the printer to retain the entire label image. To optimize batch printing, select the number of image bands (1 band = 2.54 cm (1 in)) to equal the label size. For example, if the printed image stops at a distance of 10.16 cm (4 in) from the beginning of the label, you must select four image bands to prevent reimaging if the label is 12.7 cm (5 in) long. The 3400C, 3400e, 3440, 4420, 4440, and 7421 printers automatically select the optimal number of image bands. If you increase the number of image bands on these printers, you may decrease performance.

Using Emulation Mode

Note: The 4630 and 4830 printers do not support Emulation mode. Emulation mode lets you print bar code labels that were designed on an 86XX printer in multiples of 10 or 15 mil. (Emulation mode is also called 86XX Emulation mode in some printer manuals.) Here is a summary of the features in Emulation mode: Pages are not available. Character size is specified by height and width magnification only. International characters are preceded by <SUB> or selectable by language. The bitmaps for user-defined characters (UDC) and user-defined fonts (UDF) are one bit per byte (instead of six bits per byte). Print resolution is in 10 mil dots. Two IPL commands place the printer in Emulation mode: Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up. Emulation Mode, Enter. The following table lists all the IPL commands and specifies if the command works when the printer is in Emulation mode.

56

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode

IPL Command Name 12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit Abort Print Job Advanced Mode, Select Alphanumeric Field Separator Ambient Temperature, Transmit Amount of Storage, Define Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable Auto-Transmit 1, Enable Auto-Transmit 2, Enable Auto-Transmit 3, Enable Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable Bar Code, Select Type Bar Code Field, Create or Edit Batch Count, Set Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define Box Field, Create or Edit Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define Clear All Data Clear Data From Current Field Code 39 Prefix Character, Define Command Tables, Load Command Terminator Command Terminator 1 Command Terminator 2 Communication Port Configuration, Set Configuration Parameters, Transmit Control Panel Access Permission, Set Current Edit Session, Save Cut Cutter, Enable or Disable Dark Adjust Dark Adjust, Set Data Shift - International Characters Syntax U <EM> <ESC>C <GS> A <SI>N <SI>a <ESC>j <ESC>d <ESC>e <ESC>k c B <US> y x T b W X r <CAN> <DEL> p C ; <NUL> <LF> <SI>P <ESC>p <SI>A N <SO> <SI>c K <SI>d <SUB> Page 201 86 91 92 201 114 114 115 115 115 115 141 161 93 162 164 165 165 166 167 168 93 93 171 171 201 93 94 116 94 117 172 94 118 201 118 94 Works in Emulation Mode? Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

57

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode (continued)

IPL Command Name Data Source for Format in a Page, Define Direct Graphics Mode, Select Emulation Mode, Enter Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set Error Code, Request Factory Defaults, Reset Field, Delete Field, Select Field Data, Define Source Field Decrement, Set Field Direction, Define Field Increment, Set Field Origin, Define First Data Entry Field, Select Font, Transmit Font Character Width, Define Font Type, Select Form Feed Format, Create or Edit Format, Erase Format, Select Format, Transmit Format Direction in a Page, Define Format Offset Within a Page, Define Format Position From Page, Delete Format Position in a Page, Assign Formats, Print Graphic, Select Graphic or UDC, Define Hardware Configuration Label, Print Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable Increment and Decrement, Disable Intercharacter Delay, Set Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define Syntax e <ESC>g <ESC>c <SI>C <SI>D <BEL> D D <ESC>F d <ESC>D f <ESC>I o <ACK> <ESC>v Z c <FF> A or F E <ESC>E <ESC>x q O m M f c u h h H <SI>i <ESC>N <SYN> z Page 172 96 97 119 120 86 202 172 97 173 98 175 99 175 99 100 176 178 101 180 182 101 103 181 182 183 183 202 184 184 202 185 187 122 104 122 188 Works in Emulation Mode? No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

58

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode (continued)

IPL Command Name Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable Interpretive Field, Edit Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable Label and Gap Length, Transmit Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit Label Rest Point, Adjust Label Retract, Enable or Disable Label Retract Distance, Set Label Stock Type, Select Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit Label Width, Set Length of Line or Box Field, Define Line Field, Create or Edit Maximum Label Length, Set Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set Media Sensitivity, Select Memory Usage, Transmit Message Delay, Set Next Data Entry Field, Select Number of Image Bands, Set Numeric Field Separator Online or Offline on Power-Up Options Selected, Transmit Outline Font, Clear or Create Outline Font, Download Page, Create or Edit Page, Delete Page, Select Page, Transmit Pages, Print Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set Pitch Label, Print Pitch Size, Set Point Size, Set Postamble, Set Preamble, Set Print Syntax <SI>s I i <ESC> L L <SI>f <SI>R <SI>r <SI>T T <SI>W l L <SI>L <SI>e <SI>g <ESC>m <ESC><SYN> <CR> <SI>I <FS> <SI>O <ESC>O J j S s <ESC>G <ESC>y p <SI>p C g k <EOT> <SOH> <ETB> Page 123 189 190 87 202 123 124 124 125 202 125 190 191 126 127 127 105 128 106 129 106 130 107 191 193 194 195 108 108 203 130 203 195 196 131 131 109 Works in Emulation Mode? N/A Yes Yes Yes N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N/A Yes No No No No No No Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

59

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode (continued)

IPL Command Name Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set Print Quality Label, Print Print Speed, Set Printer Language, Select Printhead Loading Mode, Select Printhead Parameters, Transmit Printhead Pressure, Set Printhead Resistance Test, Begin Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit Printhead Test Parameters, Set Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit Program Mode, Enter Program Mode, Exit Program Number, Transmit Program Number and Model, Transmit Quantity Count, Set Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit Reset Ribbon Save Zones, Set Self-Strip, Enable or Disable Slash Zero, Enable or Disable Software Configuration Label, Print Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print Status Dump Status Enquiry Takeup Motor Torque, Increase Test and Service Mode, Enter Test and Service Mode, Exit Top of Form, Set Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit User-Defined Character (UDC) and Graphics, Print User-Defined Character, Clear or Create User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit User-Defined Characters, Transmit User-Defined Font Character, Create User-Defined Fonts, Print Syntax v Q <SI>S <SI>l <SI>h <ESC>H <SI>H B S P <SI>U V <ESC>P R <ESC>M <ESC>M <RS> M <ESC>Q <DLE> <SI>Z <SI>t <SI>z s <ESC><SP> <VT> <ENQ> <SI>b <ESC>T R <SI>F G g G U <ESC>u t t Page 196 203 132 133 135 109 136 203 203 203 136 204 109 197 110 110 110 204 87 87 137 137 138 204 110 88 89 139 111 204 139 204 204 197 197 111 198 205 Works in Emulation Mode? N/A Yes Yes Yes No Yes N/A N/A N/A Yes N/A N/A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes N/A Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

60

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

IPL Commands and Emulation Mode (continued)

IPL Command Name User-Defined Tables, Transmit Warm Boot Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define Syntax <ESC>Z <BS> w Page 112 112 199 Works in Emulation Mode? Yes Yes Yes

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

61

Chapter 5 Advanced Printer Programming

62

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

This chapter contains tables that show the page numbers in Chapter 7 where each IPL command is described. The tables are organized in various ways to help you find the command you are looking for. To find a command, you can refer to any of these tables, which include the page number in Chapter 7 on which the command is described: Command Tables
Table Commands Listed by Name Commands Listed by Syntax Commands Listed by Task Page 64 68 72 How the Table is Organized Alphabetized by the command name Alphabetized by the command syntax Divided into groups, further divided into the tasks you will perform, and finally alphabetized by the command name.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

63

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Name

This table lists the IPL commands in alphabetical order by name.
IPL Command 12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit Abort Print Job Advanced Mode, Select Alphanumeric Field Separator Ambient Temperature, Transmit Amount of Storage, Define Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable Auto-Transmit 1, Enable Auto-Transmit 2, Enable Auto-Transmit 3, Enable Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable Bar Code, Select Type Bar Code Field, Create or Edit Batch Count, Set Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define Box Field, Create or Edit Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define Clear All Data Clear Data From Current Field Code 39 Prefix Character, Define Command Tables, Load Command Terminator Command Terminator 1 Command Terminator 2 Communication Port Configuration, Set Configuration Parameters, Transmit Control Panel Access Permission, Set Current Edit Session, Save Cut Cutter, Enable or Disable Dark Adjust Dark Adjust, Set Syntax
U <EM> <ESC>C <GS> A <SI>N <SI>a <ESC>j <ESC>d <ESC>e <ESC>k c B <US> y x T b W X r <CAN> <DEL> p C ; <NUL> <LF> <SI>P <ESC>p <SI>A N <SO> <SI>c K <SI>d

Page 201 86 91 92 201 114 114 115 115 115 115 141 161 93 162 164 165 165 166 167 168 93 93 171 171 201 93 94 116 94 117 172 94 118 201 118

64

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Name (continued)

IPL Command Data Shift - International Characters Data Source for Format in a Page, Define Direct Graphics Mode, Select Emulation Mode, Enter Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set Error Code, Request Factory Defaults, Reset Field, Delete Field, Select Field Data, Define Source Field Decrement, Set Field Direction, Define Field Increment, Set Field Origin, Define First Data Entry Field, Select Font, Transmit Font Character Width, Define Font Type, Select Form Feed Format, Create or Edit Format Direction in a Page, Define Format, Erase Format, Select Format, Transmit Format Offset Within a Page, Define Format Position From Page, Delete Format Position in a Page, Assign Formats, Print Graphic, Select Graphic or UDC, Define Hardware Configuration Label, Print Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable Increment and Decrement, Disable Intercharacter Delay, Set Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define Syntax
<SUB> e <ESC>g <ESC>c <SI>C <SI>D <BEL> D D <ESC>F d <ESC>D f <ESC>I o <ACK> <ESC>v Z c <FF> A or F q E <ESC>E <ESC>x O m M f c u h h H <SI>i <ESC>N <SYN> z

Page 94 172 96 97 119 120 86 202 172 97 173 98 175 99 175 99 100 176 178 101 180 181 182 101 103 182 183 183 202 184 184 202 185 187 122 104 122 188

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

65

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Name (continued)

IPL Command Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable Interpretive Field, Edit Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable Label and Gap Length, Transmit Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit Label Rest Point, Adjust Label Retract, Enable or Disable Label Retract Distance, Set Label Stock Type, Select Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit Label Width, Set Length of Line or Box Field, Define Line Field, Create or Edit Maximum Label Length, Set Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set Media Sensitivity, Select Memory Usage, Transmit Message Delay, Set Next Data Entry Field, Select Number of Image Bands, Set Numeric Field Separator Online or Offline on Power-Up Options Selected, Transmit Outline Font, Clear or Create Outline Font, Download Page, Create or Edit Page, Delete Page, Select Page, Transmit Pages, Print Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set Pitch Label, Print Pitch Size, Set Point Size, Set Postamble, Set Preamble, Set Print Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set Print Quality Label, Print Syntax
<SI>s I i <ESC> L L <SI>f <SI>R <SI>r <SI>T T <SI>W l L <SI>L <SI>e <SI>g <ESC>m <ESC><SYN> <CR> <SI>I <FS> <SI>O <ESC>O J j S s <ESC>G <ESC>y p <SI>p C g k <EOT> <SOH> <ETB> v Q

Page 123 189 190 87 202 123 124 124 125 202 125 190 191 126 127 127 105 128 106 129 106 130 107 191 193 194 195 108 108 203 130 203 195 196 131 131 109 196 203

66

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Name (continued)

IPL Command Print Speed, Set Printer Language, Select Printhead Loading Mode, Select Printhead Parameters, Transmit Printhead Pressure, Set Printhead Resistance Test, Begin Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit Printhead Test Parameters, Set Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit Program Mode, Enter Program Mode, Exit Program Number, Transmit Quantity Count, Set Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit Reset Ribbon Save Zones, Set Self-Strip, Enable or Disable Slash Zero, Enable or Disable Software Configuration Label, Print Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print Status Dump Status Enquiry Takeup Motor Torque, Increase Test and Service Mode, Enter Test and Service Mode, Exit Top of Form, Set Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit User-Defined Characters (UDC) and Graphics, Print User-Defined Character, Clear or Create User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit User-Defined Characters, Transmit User-Defined Font Character, Create User-Defined Fonts, Print User-Defined Tables, Transmit Warm Boot Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define Syntax
<SI>S <SI>l <SI>h <ESC>H <SI>H B S P <SI>U V <ESC>P R <ESC>M <RS> M <ESC>Q <DLE> <SI>Z <SI>t <SI>z s <ESC><SP> <VT> <ENQ> <SI>b <ESC>T R <SI>F G g G U <ESC>u t t <ESC>Z <BS> w

Page 132 133 135 109 136 203 203 203 136 204 109 197 110 110 204 87 87 137 137 138 204 110 88 89 139 111 204 139 204 204 197 197 111 198 205 112 112 199

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

67

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Syntax

This table lists the IPL commands in alphabetical order by command syntax.
Syntax ; <ACK> <BEL> <BS> <CAN> <CR> <DEL> <DLE> <EM> <ENQ> <EOT> <ESC>L <ESC><SP> <ESC><SYN> <ESC>c <ESC>C <ESC>d <ESC>D <ESC>e <ESC>E <ESC>F <ESC>g <ESC>G <ESC>H <ESC>I <ESC>j <ESC>k <ESC>L <ESC>m <ESC>M <ESC>N <ESC>O <ESC>p <ESC>P <ESC>Q <ESC>T IPL Command Command Terminator First Data Entry Field, Select Error Code, Request Warm Boot Clear All Data Next Data Entry Field, Select Clear Data From Current Field Reset Abort Print Job Status Enquiry Postamble, Set Label and Gap Length, Transmit Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print Message Delay, Set Emulation Mode, Enter Advanced Mode, Select Auto-Transmit 2, Enable Field Decrement, Set Auto-Transmit 3, Enable Format, Select Field, Select Direct Graphics Mode, Select Page, Select Printhead Parameters, Transmit Field Increment, Set Auto-Transmit 1, Enable Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable Label and Gap Length, Transmit Memory Usage, Transmit Program Number, Transmit Increment and Decrement, Disable Options Selected, Transmit Configuration Parameters, Transmit Program Mode, Enter Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit Test and Service Mode, Enter Page 201 99 86 112 93 106 93 87 86 89 131 87 110 128 97 91 115 98 115 101 97 96 108 109 99 115 115 87 105 110 104 107 94 109 87 111

68

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Syntax (continued)

Syntax <ESC>u <ESC>v <ESC>x <ESC>y <ESC>Z <ETB> <FF> <FS> <GS> <LF> <NUL> <RS> <SI>a <SI>A <SI>b <SI>c <SI>C <SI>d <SI>D <SI>e <SI>f <SI>F <SI>g <SI>h <SI>H <SI>i <SI>I <SI>l <SI>L <SI>N <SI>O <SI>p <SI>P <SI>r <SI>R <SI>s <SI>S <SI>t <SI>T IPL Command User-Defined Characters, Transmit Font, Transmit Format, Transmit Page, Transmit User-Defined Tables, Transmit Print Form Feed Numeric Field Separator Alphanumeric Field Separator Command Terminator 2 Command Terminator 1 Quantity Count, Set Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable Control Panel Access Permission, Set Takeup Motor Torque, Increase Cutter, Enable or Disable Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up Dark Adjust, Set End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set Label Rest Point, Adjust Top of Form, Set Media Sensitivity, Select Printhead Loading Mode, Select Printhead Pressure, Set IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable Number of Image Bands, Set Printer Language, Select Maximum Label Length, Set Amount of Storage, Define Online or Offline on Power-Up Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set Communication Port Configuration, Set Label Retract Distance, Set Label Retract, Enable or Disable Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable Print Speed, Set Self-Strip, Enable or Disable Label Stock Type, Select Page 111 100 103 108 112 109 101 106 92 94 93 110 114 117 139 118 119 118 120 127 123 139 127 135 136 122 129 133 126 114 130 130 116 124 124 123 132 137 125

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

69

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Syntax (continued)

Syntax <SI>U <SI>W <SI>z <SI>Z <SO> <SOH> <SUB> <SYN> <US> <VT> A A or F b B B c c c C C d D D e E f f g g G G h h H i I j J k IPL Command Printhead Test Parameters, Set Label Width, Set Slash Zero, Enable or Disable Ribbon Save Zones, Set Cut Preamble, Set Data Shift - International Characters Intercharacter Delay, Set Batch Count, Set Status Dump Ambient Temperature, Transmit Format, Create or Edit Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define Bar Code Field, Create or Edit Printhead Resistance Test, Begin Bar Code, Select Type Font Type, Select Graphic, Select Command Tables, Load Pitch Label, Print Field Data, Define Source Factory Defaults, Reset Field, Delete Data Source for Format in a Page, Define Format, Erase Field Direction, Define Formats, Print Pitch Size, Set User-Defined Characters and Graphics, Print Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit User-Defined Character, Clear or Create Hardware Configuration Label, Print Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable Interpretive Field, Edit Outline Font, Download Outline Font, Clear or Create Point Size, Set Page 136 125 138 137 94 131 94 122 93 88 201 180 165 161 203 141 178 184 171 203 173 202 172 172 182 175 202 195 204 204 197 202 185 187 190 189 193 191 196

70

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Syntax (continued)

Syntax K l L L m M M N o O p p P q Q r R R S s S s t t T T u U U v V w W x X y z Z IPL Command Dark Adjust Length of Line or Box Field, Define Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit Line Field, Create or Edit Format Position From Page, Delete Format Position in a Page, Assign Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit Current Edit Session, Save Field Origin, Define Format Offset Within a Page, Define Code 39 Prefix Character, Define Pages, Print Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit Format Direction in a Page, Define Print Quality Label, Print Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define Program Mode, Exit Test and Service Mode, Exit Page, Create or Edit Page, Delete Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit Software Configuration Label, Print User-Defined Font Character, Create User-Defined Fonts, Print Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit Graphic or UDC, Define 12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define Box Field, Create or Edit Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define Font Character Width, Define Page 201 190 202 191 183 183 204 172 175 182 171 203 203 181 203 168 197 204 194 195 203 204 198 205 165 202 184 201 197 196 204 199 166 164 167 162 188 176

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

71

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Commands Listed by Task

This section focuses on the tasks that you will perform with IPL commands, such as editing bar code fields on a label. Each table presents a task and lists the IPL commands that you must use to perform that task. For example, to edit bar code fields while the printer is in Program mode, you must use all the commands shown in the second table in this section. Note: This section does not list all the IPL commands, only the commands that are necessary to perform specific tasks. For a complete list of commands, see the table of contents, Commands Listed by Name, or Commands Listed by Syntax earlier in this chapter. Some command names in this section have been modified slightly to indicate exactly how you will use the command to perform the task.

Immediate Commands
System Commands
Syntax <BEL> <DLE> <EM> <ENQ> <VT> <ESC>L <ESC>Q Command Error Code, Request Reset Abort Print Job Status Enquiry Status Dump Label and Gap Length, Transmit Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit Page 86 87 86 89 88 87 87

Program Mode Commands

Bar Code Field Editing Commands
Syntax c d f h i o p r w Command Bar Code, Select Type Field Data, Define Source Field Direction, Define Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable Field Origin, Define Code 39 Prefix Character, Define Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define Page 141 173 175 185 190 175 171 168 199

72

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Bitmap User-Defined Font Editing Commands

Syntax t u X x y Z z Command User-Defined Font Character, Create Graphic or UDC, Define Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define Font Character Width, Define Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define Page 198 184 167 164 162 176 188

Box Field Editing Commands

Syntax f h l o w Command Field Direction, Define Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define Length of Line or Box Field, Define Field Origin, Define Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define Page 175 185 190 175 199

Format Editing Commands

Syntax B D H I L U W Command Bar Code Field, Create or Edit Field, Delete Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit Interpretive Field, Edit Line Field, Create or Edit User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit Box Field, Create or Edit Page 161 172 187 189 191 197 166

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

73

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Human-Readable Field Editing Commands

Syntax b c d f g h k o r w Command Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define Font Type, Select Field Data, Define Source Field Direction, Define Pitch Size, Set Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define Point Size, Set Field Origin, Define Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define Page 165 178 173 175 195 185 196 175 168 199

Interpretive Field Editing Commands

Syntax b c f g h k o r w Command Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define Font Type, Select Field Direction, Define Pitch Size, Set Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define Point Size, Set Field Origin, Define Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define Page 165 178 175 195 185 196 175 168 199

Line Field Editing Commands

Syntax f l o w Command Field Direction, Define Length of Line or Box Field, Define Field Origin, Define Width of Line, Box, Bar or Character, Define Page 175 190 175 199

74

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Page Editing Commands

Syntax e M m O q Command Data Source for Format in a Page, Define Format Position in a Page, Assign Format Position From Page, Delete Format Offset Within a Page, Define Format Direction in a Page, Define Page 172 183 183 182 181

Programming Commands
Syntax A E F G J N R S s T Command Format, Create or Edit Format, Erase Format, Create or Edit User-Defined Character, Clear or Create Outline Font, Clear or Create Current Edit Session, Save Program Mode, Exit Page, Create or Edit Page, Delete Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define Page 180 182 180 197 191 172 197 194 195 165

UDC Field Editing Commands

Syntax c f h o w Command Graphic, Select Field Direction, Define Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define Field Origin, Define Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define Page 184 175 185 175 199

UDC Editing Commands

Syntax u x y j J Command Graphic or UDC, Define Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define Outline Font, Download Outline Font, Clear or Create Page 184 164 162 193 191

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

75

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Print Mode Commands

Configuration Commands
Syntax <SI>a <SI>A <SI>b <SI>c <SI>C <SI>d <SI>D <SI>e <SI>f <SI>F <SI>g <SI>h <SI>H <SI>i <SI>I <SI>l <SI>L <SI>N <SI>O <SI>p <SI>r <SI>R <SI>s <SI>S <SI>t <SI>T <SI>U <SI>W <SI>z <SI>Z Command Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable Control Panel Access Permission, Set Takeup Motor Torque, Increase Cutter, Enable or Disable Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up Dark Adjust, Set End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set Label Rest Point, Adjust Top of Form, Set Media Sensitivity, Select Printhead Loading Mode, Select Printhead Pressure, Set IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable Number of Image Bands, Set Printer Language, Select Maximum Label Length, Set Amount of Storage, Define Online or Offline on Power-Up Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set Label Retract Distance, Set Label Retract, Enable or Disable Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable Print Speed, Set Self-Strip, Enable or Disable Label Stock Type, Select Printhead Test Parameters, Set Label Width, Set Slash Zero, Enable or Disable Ribbon Save Zones, Set Page 114 117 139 118 119 118 120 127 123 139 127 135 136 122 129 133 126 114 130 130 124 124 123 132 137 125 136 125 138 137

76

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Print Commands
Syntax <ACK> <BS> <CAN> <CR> <DEL> <ESC>c <ESC>C <ESC>D <ESC>E <ESC>F <ESC>g <ESC>G <ESC>H <ESC>I <ESC>m <ESC>M <ESC>N <ESC>O <ESC>p <ESC>P <ESC><SP> <ESC>T <ESC>u <ESC>v <ESC>x <ESC>y <ESC>Z <ETB> <FF> <FS> <GS> <LF> <NUL> <RS> <SO> <SUB> <US> Command First Data Entry Field, Select Warm Boot Clear All Data Next Data Entry Field, Select Clear Data From Current Field Emulation Mode, Select Advanced Mode, Select Field Decrement, Set Format, Select Field, Select Direct Graphics Mode, Select Page, Select Printhead Parameters, Transmit Field Increment, Set Memory Usage, Transmit Program Number, Transmit Increment and Decrement, Disable Options Selected, Transmit Configuration Parameters, Transmit Program Mode, Enter Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print Test and Service Mode, Enter User-Defined Characters, Transmit Font, Transmit Format, Transmit Page, Transmit User-Defined Tables, Transmit Print Form Feed Numeric Field Separator Alphanumeric Field Separator Command Terminator 2 Command Terminator 1 Quantity Count, Set Cut Data Shift - International Characters Batch Count, Set Page 99 112 93 106 93 97 91 98 101 97 96 108 109 99 105 110 104 107 94 109 110 111 111 100 103 108 112 109 101 106 92 94 93 110 94 94 93

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

77

Chapter 6 Finding IPL Commands in This Manual

Protocol Modification Commands

Syntax <EOT> <ESC>d <ESC>e <ESC>j <ESC>k <SI>p <SI>P <ESC><SYN> <SOH> <SYN> Command Postamble, Set Auto-Transmit 2, Enable Auto-Transmit 3, Enable Auto-Transmit 1, Enable Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set Communication Port Configuration, Set Message Delay, Set Preamble, Set Intercharacter Delay, Set Page 131 115 115 115 115 130 116 128 131 122

Test and Service Commands

Syntax ; A B C D f g G h K L M p P Q R s S t T U V Command Command Terminator Ambient Temperature, Transmit Printhead Resistance Test, Begin Pitch Label, Print Factory Defaults, Reset Formats, Print User-Defined Characters (UDC) and Graphics, Print Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit Hardware Configuration Label, Print Dark Adjust Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit Pages, Print Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit Print Quality Label, Print Test and Service Mode, Exit Software Configuration Label, Print Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit User-Defined Fonts, Print Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit 12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit Page 201 201 203 203 202 202 204 204 202 201 202 204 203 203 203 204 204 203 205 202 201 204

78

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

IPL Command Reference

This chapter describes all of the IPL commands. The commands are grouped by type (Immediate, Print, Configuration, Program, and Test and Service) and alphabetized within each type. The commands listed in this chapter are used for all Intermec printers. Defaults, ranges of values for the variables, and special notes for specific printers are presented in a chart under the Printers heading.
Convention <> Description Angle brackets < > enclose mnemonic representations of ASCII control characters. For example, <ETX> represents the ASCII End of Text control character. Italic text represents variable data, which you must replace with a real value. For example, n signifies a variable for which you must designate a constant value. Italic text within brackets represents optional data. Bold text represents a key on your keypad. For example, Ctrl represents the Ctrl key. When two keys are joined with a dash, press them simultaneously. For example, if you see the command Ctrl-Z, press the two keys at the same time. Type all characters that appear in the Courier font by pressing an individual key on the keypad.

data

[data] Ctrl Ctrl-Z

E3;F3

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

79

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Which Commands Does Your Printer Support?

The next table shows which commands are supported by each printer. A indicates that the printer supports the command, and a blank space indicates that the printer ignores the command.
3 2 4 0 3 4 0 0 3 4 0 0e 3 4 4 0 3 6 0 0 4 1 0 0 4 4 0 0 (i only) 4 4 X 0 4 X 3 0 7 4 2 1 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

IPL Command 12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit Abort Print Job Advanced Mode, Select Alphanumeric Field Separator Ambient Temperature, Transmit Amount of Storage, Define Auto-Transmit 1, Enable Auto-Transmit 2, Enable Auto-Transmit 3, Enable Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable Bar Code, Select Type Bar Code Field, Create or Edit Batch Count, Set Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define Box Field, Create or Edit Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define Clear All Data Clear Data From Current Field Command Tables, Load

Page 201 86 91 92 201 114 115 115 115 115 141 161 93 162 164 165 165 166 167 168 93 93 171

Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable 114

Code 39 Prefix Character, Define 171

80

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

3 2 4 0 3 4 0 0 3 4 0 0e 3 4 4 0 3 6 0 0 4 1 0 0 4 4 0 0 4 4 X 0 4 X 3 0 7 4 2 1
(C, D)

IPL Command Command Terminator Command Terminator 1 Command Terminator 2 Communication Port Configuration, Set Configuration Parameters, Transmit

Page 201 93 94 116 94

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i (i only)

Control Panel Access Permission, 117 Set Current Edit Session, Save Cut Cutter, Enable or Disable Dark Adjust Dark Adjust, Set Data Shift - International Characters Data Source for Format in a Page, Define Direct Graphics Mode, Select Emulation Mode, Enter Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set Error Code, Request Factory Defaults, Reset Field, Delete Field, Select Field Data, Define Source Field Decrement, Set Field Direction, Define Field Increment, Set Field Origin, Define First Data Entry Field, Select Font, Transmit Font Character Width, Define 172 94 118 201 118 94 172 96 97 119 120 86 202 172 97 173 98 175 99 175 99 100 176

(C, D)

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

81

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

3 2 4 0 3 4 0 0
(C, D)

IPL Command Font Type, Select Form Feed Format, Create or Edit Format Direction in a Page, Define Format, Erase Format, Select Format, Transmit Format Offset Within a Page, Define Format Position From Page, Delete Formats, Print Graphic, Select Graphic or UDC, Define Hardware Configuration Label, Print Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable Increment and Decrement, Disable Intercharacter Delay, Set Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable Interpretive Field, Edit Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable Label and Gap Length, Transmit Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit

Page 178 101 180 181 182 101 103 182 183

3 4 0 0e

3 4 4 0

3 6 0 0

4 1 0 0

4 4 0 0

4 4 X 0

4 X 3 0

7 4 2 1

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

Format Position in a Page, Assign 183 202 184 184 202 185 187 122 104 122 188 123 189 190 87 202

(C, D)

82

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

3 2 4 0 3 4 0 0 3 4 0 0e
(400 dpi only)

IPL Command Label Rest Point, Adjust Label Retract, Enable or Disable Label Retract Distance, Set Label Stock Type, Select Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit Label Width, Set Length of Line or Box Field, Define Line Field, Create or Edit Maximum Label Length, Set Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set Media Sensitivity, Select Memory Usage, Transmit Message Delay, Set Next Data Entry Field, Select Number of Image Bands, Set Numeric Field Separator Online or Offline on Power-Up Options Selected, Transmit Outline Font, Clear or Create Outline Font, Download Page, Create or Edit Page, Delete Page, Select Page, Transmit Pages, Print Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set Pitch Label, Print Pitch Size, Set Point Size, Set Postamble, Set Preamble, Set

Page 123 124 124 125 202

3 4 4 0

3 6 0 0

4 1 0 0

4 4 0 0

4 4 X 0

4 X 3 0

7 4 2 1

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

125 190 191 126 127 127 105 128 106 129 106 130 107 191 193 194 195 108 108 203 130 203 195 196 131 131
(C, D)

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

83

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

3 2 4 0 3 4 0 0
(C, D)

IPL Command Print Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set Print Quality Label, Print Print Speed, Set Printer Language, Select Printhead Loading Mode, Select Printhead Parameters, Transmit Printhead Pressure, Set Printhead Resistance Test, Begin Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit Printhead Test Parameters, Set Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit Program Mode, Enter Program Mode, Exit Program Number, Transmit Quantity Count, Set Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit Reset Ribbon Save Zones, Set Self-Strip, Enable or Disable Slash Zero, Enable or Disable Software Configuration Label, Print Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print Status Dump Status Enquiry Takeup Motor Torque, Increase Test and Service Mode, Enter

Page 109 196 203 132 133 135 109 136 203 203 203 136 204 109 197 110 110 87 87 137 137 138 204 110 88 89 139 111

3 4 0 0e

3 4 4 0

3 6 0 0

4 1 0 0

4 4 0 0

4 4 X 0

4 X 3 0

7 4 2 1

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

(e)

Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit 204

(C, D)

84

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Commands Supported By Each Printer (continued)

3 2 4 0 3 4 0 0 3 4 0 0e 3 4 4 0 3 6 0 0 4 1 0 0 4 4 0 0 4 4 X 0 4 X 3 0 7 4 2 1 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

IPL Command Test and Service Mode, Exit Top of Form, Set Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit User-Defined Characters (UDC) and Graphics, Print User-Defined Character, Clear or Create User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit User-Defined Characters, Transmit User-Defined Font Character, Create User-Defined Fonts, Print User-Defined Tables, Transmit Warm Boot Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define

Page 204 139 204 204 197 197 111 198 205 112 112 199

(C, D)

(C, D)

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

85

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Immediate Commands
You can use Immediate commands to query the printer about the status of the printer and any print jobs, to abort print jobs, to request error conditions, and to reset the printer. Unlike other commands that the printer stores in the data buffer and executes in the order received, the printer executes immediate commands when it receives them, regardless of printer mode. For help downloading Immediate commands to the printer, see Sending IPL Commands to the Printer in Chapter 1.

Abort Print Job

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Stops batch printing.
<EM>

The printer stops the current batch print job. The batch quantity count is reset to the original setting. The printer continues to execute other commands remaining in the buffer.

Error Code, Request

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Solicits error codes from the printer.
<BEL>

The printer sends back the most recent error code as an ASCII number. The error code represents a command syntax error or a printer RAM usage error. If no errors have occurred since the printer was turned on, the printer sends a zero. It also resets the error code to 00. See Chapter 4, Troubleshooting, for a list of error codes.

86

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Label and Gap Length, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Transmits the label and gap length as measured by the number of 5 mil increments.
<ESC>L

Label length refers to the length of the label currently being processed. If the label is longer than the distance between the label sensor and the printhead, the printer transmits the length of the previous label. If you select continuous stock, the printer transmits the length defined by the Maximum Label Length, Set command (<SI>L).

Remaining Quantity and Batch Count, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Uploads the remaining quantity and batch counts for the current print job.
<ESC>Q

Reset
Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Executes a printer power-up reset immediately.
<DLE>

The printer erases all data and commands in the input buffer upon reset. In the following example, the first DLE is a transparency character. It instructs the printer to use the <DLE> as a reset command.
<STX><DLE><DLE><ETX>

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

87

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Status Dump
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400 3400e Notes The 3240 printer does not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 3400 printer does not upload <US> Label path open, <BS> Takeup reel full, or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 3400e printer does not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail. Only the 400 dpi version uploads <US> label path open. The 3440 printer does not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 3600 printer does not upload <US> Label path open, <BS> Takeup reel full, or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 4100 printer does not upload <US> Label path open, <BS> Takeup reel full, or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 4400 printer does not upload <BS> Takeup reel full. The 4420 and 4440 printers do not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 4630 and 4830 printers do not upload <SO> Printhead test fail. The 7421 printer does not upload <US> Label path open, <BS> Takeup reel full, or <SO> Printhead test fail. These printers do not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail.

Causes the printer to upload all current printer status.

<VT>

3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

Notes:

The printer uploads the status in the following order of priority for Intermec Standard Protocol. See Appendix D for codes for other protocols. <GS> <SO> <US> <US> <EM> <DC3> Buffer already full Printhead test fail Label path open Ribbon fault No label stock Buffer now full <BS> <SI> <FS> <DC1> <DC1> <DC1> Takeup reel full Printhead hot Label at strip pin Skipping Printing Ready

88

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Status Enquiry
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400 3400e Notes The 3240 printer does not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 3400 printer does not upload <US> Label path open, <BS> Takeup reel full, or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 3400e printer does not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail. Only the 400 dpi version uploads <US> Label path open. The 3440 printer does not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 3600 printer does not upload <US> Label path open, <BS> Takeup reel full, or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 4100 printer does not upload <US> Label path open, <BS> Takeup reel full, or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 4400 printer does not upload <BS> Takeup reel full. The 4420 and 4440 printers do not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail. The 4630 and 4830 printers do not upload <SO> Printhead test fail. The 7421 printer does not upload <US> Label path open, <BS> Takeup reel full, or <SO> Printhead test fail. These printers do not upload either <BS> Takeup reel full or <SO> Printhead test fail.

Transmits the current printer status to the host.

<ENQ>

3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

Notes:

The printer uploads the status in the following order of priority for Intermec Standard Protocol. See Appendix D for codes for other protocols. <GS> <SO> <US> <US> <EM> <DC3> Buffer already full Printhead test fail Label path open Ribbon fault No label stock Buffer now full <BS> <SI> <FS> <DC1> <DC1> <DC1> Takeup reel full Printhead hot Label at strip pin Skipping Printing Ready

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

89

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Print Commands
You can use Print commands to pass data to formats and print labels. When you enter data into a format for printing, the printer uses a field pointer to designate the field in the format where the data should print. If you choose a new format, the field pointer automatically points to the lowest numbered data entry field and continues to point to that field until you select a different field or format. If you select a field by using the <CR> or <ESC>F command, new data entered into the field overwrites any data already existing in the field. Print commands are effective when the printer is in Print mode. You can switch to Print mode with this command:
<STX>R<ETX>

For help downloading Print commands to the printer, see Sending IPL Commands to the Printer in Chapter 1. Note: You must precede each string of commands with the start of message character <STX> and follow it with the end of message character <ETX>. The next command in the message terminates all Print mode commands. The command separator (<NUL> or <LF>) is optional between commands, but is necessary to separate commands from data. For example, to separate the <ESC>F command from data, type:
<ESC>F4<NUL>data

90

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Advanced Mode, Select

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400e Default n=1 200 dpi: N/A 400 dpi: n = 1 3440 44X0 n=1 4420: N/A 4440: n = 1 Values for n 0 = 5.0 mil (0.005 inch) dot size 1 = 2.5 mil (0.0025 inch) dot size 0 = 5.0 mil (0.005 inch) dot size 1 = 2.5 mil (0.0025 inch) dot size The n parameter is not available on the 3400e with the 200 dpi option. Notes

Instructs the printer to operate in Advanced mode. Advanced mode is the default mode; the alternative operating mode is Emulation mode.
<ESC>Cn

where n specifies the dot size.

0 = 5.0 mil (0.005 inch) dot size 1 = 2.5 mil (0.0025 inch) dot size 0 = 5.0 mil (0.005 inch) dot size 1 = 2.5 mil (0.0025 inch) dot size The n parameter is not available on the 4420.

Notes:

The field pointer designates the first field in format 0. Page 0 is the default page. You will lose all previously host-entered data when you switch operating modes.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

91

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Alphanumeric Field Separator

Purpose: Increments or decrements alphanumeric characters within a field-separated region. You must enclose the data between two sets of <GS> commands:
<GS>data<GS> <GS>

Syntax:

Alphanumeric characters are 0 to 9 and A to Z. The order of the characters is 0, 1, 2...8, 9, A, B, C...Y, Z, 0, 1...9, A, B.... Notes: You may have more than one region in a field as long as they do not overlap. Each region independently increments or decrements according to the increment or decrement value specified for the field. The length of data does not change. Rather, the values increment or decrement as in an odometer. For example, 9 increments to 0, and Z increments to A. This command marks the region of characters to increment or decrement, but it does not actually increment or decrement. The printer ignores any non-alphanumeric characters within this region. The following example illustrates the Alphanumeric Field Separator command:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E1;F1;<ETX> <STX>H1;o175,10;f3;c2;h2;w2;b10;<ETX> <STX>H2;o75,10;f3;c2;h2;w2;b10;<ETX> <STX>H3;o200,10;f3;c7;h2;w2<ETX> <STX>H4;o100,10;f3;c7;h2;w2<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX> <STX><CR><ESC>I1<GS>A<GS><ETX> <STX><CR><ESC>D1<GS>C<GS><ETX> <STX><CR>Increment Field<ETX> <STX><CR>Decrement Field<ETX> <STX><RS>3<ETB><ETX>

92

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Batch Count, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=1 Values for n 1 to 9999 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Sets the number of labels to be printed in the next batch.

<US>n

where n is the number of labels.

Notes:

This command causes the printer to make n copies of the same label. The total number of labels printed per print command is equal to the quantity in each batch multiplied by the number of batches. The printer generates an error code (21) if n is out of range. See your printer users manual for help optimizing image bands for batch printing.

Clear All Data

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Clears all host-entered data from the current page or format.
<CAN>

If you select a format, the pointer indicates the first data entry field in the format after you clear the data. If you select a page, the pointer designates the first data entry field in the first format.

Clear Data From Current Field

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Deletes data from the current field.
<DEL>

The field pointer continues to designate the current field even after you clear the data.

Command Terminator 1
Purpose: Syntax: Terminates the current command.
<NUL>

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

93

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Command Terminator 2
Purpose: Syntax: Terminates the current command.
<LF>

Configuration Parameters, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Uploads the current configuration commands from the printer.
<ESC>p

The printer transmits only the configuration parameters that you can set from the host. Use this command to view, edit, or copy the current configuration command settings. See your printer users manual for a list of the configuration parameters that the printer uploads to the host.

Cut
Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Advances the label out to the cutter and cuts the label stock.
<SO>

This command is executed only if the cutter is installed but not enabled. Use this command only after you have printed a batch of labels.

Data Shift International Characters

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Allows you to enter selected command characters as data.
<SUB>

or <DLE>

In Emulation mode, this command shifts the next character (if not a control character) into the upper character bank (setting the eighth bit to 1) to print international characters. This command lets you enter selected command characters as data instead of commands in both Advanced and Emulation mode. For example, use this command to enter a <GS> or <CR> as data in a bar code or text field.

94

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Data Shift International Characters (continued) Use <SUB> to send the following command characters as data: <ACK> <DC4> <FF> <NUL> <SYN> <BEL> <EM> <FS> <RS> <US> <BS> <ENQ> <GS> <SI> <VT> <CAN> <EOT> <HT> <SO> <CR> <ESC> <LF> <SOH> <DC2> <ETB> <NAK> <SUB> Use <DLE> to send these command characters as data: <DC1> <DC3> <STX> <ETX> To send <DLE> as data, preface it with the command <SUB><DLE>. This example illustrates using the Data Shift command to print control or command characters in a data field.
<STX<ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E1;F1;<ETX> <STX>H0;o750,10;f3;c0;h3;w2;b10;d0,50<ETX> <STX>B1;o300,10;f3;c0;h200;w1;i1;r2<ETX> <STX>B2;o600,10;f3;c0;h200;w1;i1;r2<ETX> <STX>I1;o75,10;f3;c0;h3;w3<ETX> <STX>I2;o375,10;f3;c0;h3;w3<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>E1<ETX> <STX><CAN><ETX> <STX>Example for printing control codes<CR><ETX> <STX><SUB><NUL><SUB><SOH><DLE><STX><DLE><ETX><SUB><EOT> <SUB><ENQ><SUB><ACK><SUB><BEL><SUB><BS><SUB><HT><SUB><LF> <SUB><VT><SUB><FF><SUB><CR><SUB><SO><SUB><SI> <SUB><DLE><DLE> <SUB><DC1><SUB><DC2><ETX> <STX><CR><ETX> <STX><SUB><DC3><SUB><DC4><SUB><NAK><SUB><SYN><SUB><ETB> <SUB><CAN><SUB><EM><SUB><SUB><SUB> <ESC><SUB><FS><SUB><GS><SUB><RS><SUB><US><ETX> <STX><US>1<ETX> <STX><RS>1<ETX> <STX><ETB><ETX>

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

95

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Direct Graphics Mode, Select

Purpose: Syntax: Allows you to download graphic images directly into image memory without storing them in nonvolatile RAM.
<ESC>gm

where m specifies the format of the data to follow. Printers:

Printer 3400C, 3400e Default m=0 Values for m 0 = 8 bits per byte 1 = 8 bits per byte that have been nibblized 0 = 8 bits per byte 1 = 8 bits per byte that have been nibblized 0 = 8 bits per byte 1 = 8 bits per byte that have been nibblized 0 = 8 bits per byte 1 = 8 bits per byte that have been nibblized 0 = 8 bits per byte 1 = 8 bits per byte that have been nibblized When the printer is in Direct Graphics mode, the printer treats all Immediate commands as Direct Graphics commands. Notes When the printer is in Direct Graphics mode, the printer treats all Immediate commands as Direct Graphics commands.

3440

m=0

44X0

m=0

7421

m=0

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

m=0

Notes:

For more information on direct graphics, see Appendix E, Using Direct Graphics Mode.

96

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Emulation Mode, Enter

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 = 10 mil (0.010 inch) dot size 1 = 15 mil (0.015 inch) dot size for bar codes only (other fields are 10 mil)

Instructs the printer to operate in Emulation mode. The default is Advanced Mode.
<ESC>cn

where n specifies the dot size.

Notes:

Emulation mode lets you print bar code labels that were designed on an 86XX printer in multiples of 10 or 15 mil. The field pointer designates the first field in format 0. You disable the page select command and lose all previously host-entered data.

Field, Select
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 to 199 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Selects a data field for entering or working with data.

<ESC>Fn or <ESC>Fname

where n is the number of the field.

Notes:

The parameter for this command can either be the field number or the field name, but not both. If neither is present, the printer defaults to 0. If you use the field number, the printer enters all following data into field n. If you use the field name, the printer enters all following data into all fields with the specified name in the current format or page. You must bracket the field name with quotation marks ( ). The printer generates an error code (38) if you enter an invalid field number.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

97

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Field, Select (continued) The following example illustrates employing the Field, Select command to enter data into a field identified by a number:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E1;F1;<ETX> <STX>H0;o450,50;c0;f3;h3;w2;b10;d0,35<ETX> <STX>H1;o300,50;c0;h2;w2;f3<ETX> <STX>B2;o250,50;c0,3;f3;h200;w2;i1;<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX> <STX><ESC>F0<DEL>Example printing by field number<ETX> <STX><ESC>F1<DEL>This is a test<ETX> <STX><ESC>F2<DEL>Test<ETX> <STX><US>1<ETX> <STX><RS>1<ETX> <STX><ETB><ETX>

The following example illustrates employing the Field, Select command to enter data into a field identified by a name:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E1;F1;<ETX> <STX>H0,Example;o450,50;c0;f3;h3;w2;b10;d0,35<ETX> <STX>H1,Text;o300,50;c0;h2;w2;f3<ETX> <STX>B2,Barcode;o250,50;c0,3;f3;h200;w2;i1;<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX> <STX><ESC>F"Example"<DEL>Example printing by field name<ETX> <STX><ESC>F"Text"<DEL>This is a test<ETX> <STX><ESC>F"Barcode"<DEL>Test<ETX> <STX><US>1<ETX> <STX><RS>1<ETX> <STX><ETB><ETX>

Field Decrement, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=1 Values for n 0 to 9999 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Sets the field decrement value for the selected field.

<ESC>Dn

where n is the field decrement value.

98

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Field Decrement, Set (continued) Notes: In the section of data separated by <FS> or <GS>, the printer decrements the values in data entry fields by n after it prints each batch. The printer generates an error code (22) if the decrement value is out of range.

Field Increment, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=1 Values for n 1 to 9999 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Sets the increment value for the selected field.

<ESC>In

where n is the increment value.

Notes:

In the section of data separated by <FS> or <GS>, the printer increments the values in data entry fields by n after it prints each batch. You must use this command when you are defining a format in Programming mode. This example shows how to use the field increment command:
<STX><ESC>E5<CAN><ETX> <STX>Lot 23455 262948<CR><FS>307 91747<FS><ESC>I2<ETX> <STX><RS>5<ETB><ETX>

The printer generates an error code (22) if the increment value is out of range.

First Data Entry Field, Select

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Sets the field pointer to the lowest numbered data entry field that can accept Print mode data.
<ACK>

This command ensures that data prints in the field with the lowest number if you do not want to specify a data field by its field number.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

99

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Font, Transmit
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default None None None Values for n 0 to 28, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 24 0 to 25, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option

Uploads a font from the printer in the form of commands and data the printer receives to create the font.
<ESC>vn

where n is the font ID number.

None None None None None None None None None

0 to 28, 30 to 41 and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 28, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 25, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 24 0 to 25 0 to 28, 30 to 41, and 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 28, 30 to 41 0 to 28, 30 to 41 0 to 28, 30 to 41

Notes:

You can set n to a number from 0 to 56, depending on the fonts your printer supports. The font names are listed in the Values for n table on page 178.

100

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Font, Transmit (continued) If you send <ESC>v to the printer without specifying a value for the n parameter, the printer (except for the 3400A, 3400B, 3600, and 4400) uploads the entire user-defined fonts directory. The directory appears in this format:
IDnumber, name, type, storage size<CR><LF>

where: IDnumber name type storage size is the font number that was specified by n in the command that created the user-defined font. is the optional font name that may have been specified by ,name in the command that created the user-defined font. is 200 for Bitmap fonts, 300 for Speedo outline fonts, or 301 for TrueType fonts. is 0 for resident fonts.

Always transmit fonts in Advanced mode. The target printer remains in Advanced mode. The printer generates an error code (27) if you enter an invalid number.

Form Feed
Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Feeds a label out to the next print point.
<FF>

If you use self-strip, the printer feeds out one blank label to the strip pin, skipping an entire label. If you use batch operation with die-cut label stock, the label moves to the tear bar. If you use continuous label stock, the label stock moves the same amount as the end-of-print skip distance.

Format, Select
Purpose: Syntax: Selects a format for data entry or printing.
<ESC>En[,m]

where n is the numeric format ID and ,m specifies to reimage only changed fields.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

101

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Format, Select (continued) Printers:

Printer 3240 Default n=0 Values for n 0 to 99 Values for ,m 0 = the printer reimages the entire label. 1 = the printer only reimages the changed fields. 3400A 3400B n=0 0 to 19 0 = the printer reimages the entire label. 1 = the printer only reimages the changed fields. 3400C 3400D 3400e n=0 *, 0 to 19 Not available If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer temporarily stores the label format in RAM. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer temporarily stores the label format in RAM. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer temporarily stores the label format in RAM. Notes

n=0

*, 0 to 99

Not available

3440

n=0

*, 0 to 99

Not available

3600

n=0

0 to 19

0 = the printer reimages the entire label. 1 = the printer only reimages the changed fields.

4400

n=0

0 to 19

0 = the printer reimages the entire label. 1 = the printer only reimages the changed fields.

44X0

n=0

*, 0 to 99

Not available

If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer temporarily stores the label format in RAM. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer temporarily stores the label format in RAM. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer temporarily stores the label format in RAM. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer temporarily stores the label format in RAM.

4X30

n=0

0 to 19

Not available

7421

n=0

*, 0 to 99

Not available

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n=0

*, 0 to 99

Not available

102

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Format, Select (continued) Notes: If you select a page other than 0, n is an alphabetic format position within the page with a range from a to z. After you select the format, the field pointer points to the lowest numbered data entry field. The printer must be able to completely image a label, within the available number of image bands, for the reimaging command to work and retain the image. The printer starts imaging the label as soon as it receives the command to select a format. The printer clears all host entered/variable data from this format. The printer generates an error code (36) if you enter an invalid format number.

Format, Transmit
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default None None None Values for n 0 to 19 0 to 19 0 to 99

Uploads a format from the printer in the form of commands and data the printer uses to create the format.
<ESC>xn

where n is the format ID number.

None None None None None None None None

0 to 99 0 to 19 0 to 19 0 to 19 0 to 99 0 to 19 0 to 99 0 to 99

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

103

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Format, Transmit (continued) Notes: If you send <ESC>x to the printer without specifying a value for the n parameter, the printer (except for the 3400A, 3400B, 3600, and 4400) uploads the entire format directory. The directory appears in this format:
[IDnumber] [name] [type] [storage size]<CR><LF>

where: IDnumber name type is the format number that was specified by n in the command that created the format. is the optional format name that may have been specified by ,name in the command that created the format. is 0 for formats.

storage size is the number of bytes needed to store the format. The target printer remains in Advanced mode. The printer generates an error code (25) if you enter an invalid number.

Increment and Decrement, Disable

Purpose: Syntax: Resets any increment or decrement flags for the current field.
<ESC>N

104

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Memory Usage, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Uploads information on the amount of memory installed or allocated and the amount of memory not being used.
<ESC>mn

where n specifies the type of the memory. Printers:

Printer 3400e Default n=0 Values for n 0 = Transmits the amounts of memory that are available and free. 1 = Transmits the amount of installed SRAM, DRAM, or Flash RAM. 3440 n=0 0 = Transmits the amounts of memory that are available and free. 1 = Transmits the amount of installed SRAM, DRAM, or Flash RAM. 44X0 n=0 0 = Transmits the amounts of memory that are available and free. 1 = Transmits the amount of installed SRAM, DRAM, or Flash RAM. EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i n=0 0 = Transmits the amounts of memory that are available and free. 1 = Transmits the amount of installed SRAM, DRAM, or Flash RAM.

Notes:

The printer uploads the amount of total storage memory available for formats, fonts, and UDCs. The amount of available RAM not being used follows the amount of total RAM. The printer separates the numbers by a comma: 32,10. This command was called Storage Area Usage, Transmit in older versions of the 3240, 3400, and 3600 printer manuals. This command is called Static RAM Usage, Transmit in the 4400 printer manual.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

105

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Next Data Entry Field, Select

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Moves the field pointer to the next data entry field.
<CR>

If you have not selected a page and the pointer is designating the last field, the field pointer moves back to the first data entry field in the format. If you selected a multiformat page and the field pointer is pointing to the last field in a format, it moves to the first field in the next format.

Numeric Field Separator

Purpose: Specifies which numeric data within a field to increment or decrement. You must enclose the data between two sets of <FS> commands:
<FS>data<FS>. <FS>

Syntax: Notes:

You can have more than one region per field as long as they do not overlap. The printer independently increments or decrements each region according to the increment or decrement value specified for the field. The length of data does not change. Rather, the values increment or decrement as in an odometer: 9 increments to 0. The printer ignores any nonnumeric characters within the region. The following example illustrates the Numeric Field Separator command:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E1;F1;<ETX> <STX>H1;o175,10;f3;c2;h2;w2;b10;<ETX> <STX>H2;o75,10;f3;c2;h2;w2;b10;<ETX> <STX>H3;o200,10;f3;c7;h2;w2<ETX> <STX>H4;o100,10;f3;c7;h2;w2<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX> <STX><CR><ESC>I1<FS>1<FS><ETX> <STX><CR><ESC>D1<FS>10<FS><ETX> <STX><CR>Increment Field<ETX> <STX><CR>Decrement Field<ETX> <STX><RS>3<ETB><ETX>

106

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Options Selected, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3400e Values Returned by Printer 0 = No options selected 4 = Self-strip 0 = No options selected 4 = Self-strip 0 = No options selected 1 = Cutter 4 = Self-strip 0 = No options selected 1 = Cutter 4 = Self-strip 0 = No options selected 4 = Self-strip 0 = No options selected 4 = Self-strip 0 = No options selected 1 = Cutter 4 = Self-strip 5 = Ribbon save 0 = No options selected 1 = Cutter 2 = Batch takeup 3 = Self-strip and applicator 4 = Self-strip 0 = No options selected 1 = Cutter 2 = Batch takeup (if you have the option installed) 4 = Self-strip 0 = No options selected 1 = Cutter 2 = Batch takeup 3 = Self-strip and applicator 4 = Self-strip

Uploads the list of selected options.

<ESC>O

3440 3600 4100

4400

44X0

4X30

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

107

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Options Selected, Transmit (continued)

Printer 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Values Returned by Printer 0 = No options selected 1 = Cutter 0 = No options selected 1 = Cutter 4 = Self-strip

Page, Select
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 to 9 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Selects a page for data entry or printing.

<ESC>Gn

where n is the page ID number.

Notes:

After you select the page, the field pointer points to the lowest numbered data entry field of the lowest position format. The printer clears all host-entered data from this page. The printer generates an error code (36) if you enter an invalid page number.

Page, Transmit
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default None Values for n 1 to 9 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Uploads a page from the printer in the form of commands used to create a format. It also uploads all formats in a page.
<ESC>yn

where n is the page ID number.

108

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Page, Transmit (continued) Notes: If you send <ESC>y to the printer without specifying a value for the n parameter, the printer uploads the entire page directory. The directory appears in this format:
[IDnumber] [name] [type] [storage size]<CR><LF>

where: IDnumber name type is the page number that was specified by n in the command that created the page. is the optional page name that may have been specified by ,name in the command that created the page. is 1 for pages.

storage size is always 0 for a page. The target printer remains in Advanced mode. The printer generates an error code (26) if you enter an invalid number.

Print
Purpose: Syntax: Prints the current page or format with previously entered data.
<ETB>

Printhead Parameters, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Transmits the number and size of dots in the printhead back to the host.
<ESC>H

Here is an example of what you can expect to see: 896,5.0.

Program Mode, Enter

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Causes the printer to enter Program mode for the purpose of creating or editing pages, formats, fonts, or graphics.
<ESC>P

When this command is executed, you lose all previously entered data.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

109

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Program Number, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Transmits both the program number and the version number.
<ESC>Mn

n = 0 returns program # and version # n = 1 returns program #, version #, and model # The default for n is 0. <ESC>M1 is supported by 4420, 4440, and 3400e only. Here is an example of what you might see: 059877,1.4. 3400e: <ESC>M1 returns program #, version # 3400E2 or E4 (200 dpi/400 dpi) Notes: This command uploads the program and software version number to the host as an ASCII alphanumeric character string.

Quantity Count, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Sets the quantity of label batches to be printed by the next print command.
<RS>n

where n is the number of batches. Printers:

Printer All Default n=1 Values for n 1 to 9999 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Here is an example of how to use this command:

<STX><RS>5<ETB><ETX>

Notes:

The printer generates an error code (21) if the quantity is out of range. Data increments or decrements between batches of labels.

Start and Stop Codes (Code 39), Print

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Instructs the current Code 39 field to print only the start and stop characters.
<ESC><SP>

where <SP> is the space character. The printer clears all previous data from the current field.

110

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Storage Area Usage, Transmit

See the Memory Usage, Transmit command.

Test and Service Mode, Enter

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Enters Test and Service mode.
<ESC>T

The printer completes all print jobs before executing this command. When the printer enters Test and Service mode, it erases any host-entered data that was sent prior to the command.

User-Defined Characters, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default None Values for n 0 to 99 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Uploads a graphic (user-defined character) from the printer in the form of commands and data the printer receives to create the graphic.
<ESC>un

where n is the graphic ID number.

Notes:

If you send <ESC>u to the printer without specifying a value for the n parameter, the printer (except for the 3400A, 3400B, 3600, and 4400) uploads the entire graphics directory. The directory appears in this format:
[IDnumber] [name] [type] [storage size]<CR><LF>

where: IDnumber name type is the graphic number that was specified by n in the command that created the graphic. is the optional graphic name that may have been specified by ,name in the command that created the graphic. is 100 for a graphic.

storage size is the number of bytes to store the graphic. If the printer is in Advanced mode, each data byte represents six bits of the graphic bitmap. If the printer is in Emulation mode, each data byte represents one bit of the graphic image. The printer generates an error code (28) if you enter an invalid number.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

111

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

User-Defined Tables, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All except the EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, and 7421 Values for t 0 = Print mode commands 1 = Escape print commands 2 = Shift print commands 3 = Status response 4 = Protocol characters Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Causes the printer to upload the user-defined command and protocol tables that the printer receives to download a new command set.
<ESC>Zt

where t identifies the table.

Notes:

You can find tables listing the default values in Appendix D, UserDefined Interface Tables. The printer generates an error code (12) if you enter an invalid number. Use this command to substitute protocol and command characters.

Warm Boot
Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Resets the printer with a warm boot.
<BS>

Unlike the <DLE> command, this command does not take effect immediately. The printer executes all previous commands before the warm boot takes effect. You will lose any data that is sent after this command and before the printer finishes rebooting. Use this command when configuration changes require a printer reset.

112

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Configuration Commands
Use Configuration commands to set parameters for configuration features and to enable or disable options. Configuration commands are effective when the printer is in Print mode. You can switch to Print mode with this command:
<STX>R<ETX>

For help downloading Configuration commands to the printer, see Sending IPL Commands to the Printer in Chapter 1. Note: You must precede each string of commands with the start of message character <STX> and follow it with the end of message character <ETX>. The printer terminates a configuration command when it receives the next command in the message. After reconfiguring your printer, you must cycle power or reset the printer for the commands to become effective unless specified otherwise; however, when configuring the 3400e, 4420, and 4440 printers, do not cycle power using the hardware power switch. You must send the Reset command (<BS> character) after issuing the new configuration command or commands.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

113

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Amount of Storage, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Without expanded RAM Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3600 4100 Default n = 60 n = 20 n = 60 Values for n 10K to 120K 10K to 32K 10K to 120K With expanded RAM Default n = 200 n = 120 n = 200 Values for n 10K to 504K 10K to 128K 10K to 504K

Specifies the amount of RAM you have allocated for storage.

<SI>Nn

where n is the amount of RAM in kilobytes.

n = 60 n = 20

10K to 120K 10K to 32K

n = 200 n = 120

10K to 504K 10K to 128K

Notes:

The printer buffers this command until you execute it. When you execute this command, it erases all previously stored format, fonts, or UDCs but does not change the printer configuration. Use this command with printers that share image generation and format/UDC/fonts storage area.

Audible Alarm, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 4400 EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 = Disables the audible alarm. 1 = Enables the audible alarm 0 = Disables the audible alarm. 1 = Enables the audible alarm

Turns the audible alarm feature on or off.

<SI>an

114

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Auto-Transmit 1, Enable
Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Enables auto-transmit level 1.
<ESC>j

The printer uploads the status in the following order of priority for Intermec Standard Protocol. See Appendix D, User-Defined Interface Tables, for codes for other protocols.
<DC1> <FS> <BS> <EM> <US> <US> Fault cleared. (<DC2> transmitted when Flow Control Protocol selected.) Label at strip pin Takeup reel full No label stock Ribbon fault Label path open

Auto-Transmit 2, Enable
Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Enables auto-transmit level 2.
<ESC>d

At level 2, the printer automatically transmits the status response code indicating room in input buffer (<DC1> for Standard Protocol and <DC2> for Flow Control Protocol). Without auto-transmit enabled, the host must use the <ENQ> or <VT> command to determine the status.

Auto-Transmit 3, Enable
Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Enables auto-transmit level 3.
<ESC>e

The printer transmits a status response when this condition occurs:

<HT> <SOH> <RS> Imager overrun Printing is complete and the buffer is empty Insufficient RAM for printing or storage

Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3, Disable

Purpose: Syntax: Disables the auto-transmit status responses.
<ESC>k

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

115

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Communication Port Configuration, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Sets the serial and parallel port configuration.
<SI>P[n1][,n2][,n3][,n4][,n5][,n6]

where: n1 sets the baud rate, n2 sets the parity, n3 sets the data bits, n4 sets the protocol, and n5 sets the Multi-Drop address (if you are using MultiDrop). n6 sets the parallel port mode. Printers:
Printer 7421 Defaults n1 = 3 n2 = 0 n3 = 1 n4 = 0 n5 = A n6 = 0 n1 Values 0 = 1,200 1 = 2,400 2 = 4,800 3 = 9,600 4 = 19,200 n2 Values 0 = None 1 = even 2 = odd n3 Values 0 = 7 bits 1 = 8 bits n4 Values 0= XON/XOFF 1 = Intermec XON/XOFF 2 = Intermec Standard 3 = Polling Mode D 0 = XON/XOFF 2 = Intermec Standard n5 Values A - Z, 0 - 5 n6 Values 0 = Centronic Mode 1 = 1284 Nibble Mode

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n1 = 3 n2 = 0 n3 = 1 n4 = 0

0 = 1,200 1 = 2,400 2 = 4,800 3 = 9,600 4 = 19,200 5 = 38,400 6 = 57,600 7 = 115,200

0 = None 1 = even 2 = odd

0 = 7 bits 1 = 8 bits

N/A

N/A

116

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Control Panel Access Permission, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 4400 Default n=0 Values for n 0 = Allows access to all menus (operator, configuration, installation, and test and service) 1 = Allows access to the operator and configuration menus only 2 = Allows access to the operator menu only 3 = Denies access to all menus 0 = Allows access to all menus (operator, configuration, installation, and test and service) 1 = Allows access to the operator and configuration menus only 2 = Allows access to the operator menu only 3 = Denies access to all menus 0 = Allows access to all Setup menus 1 = Denies access to all Setup menus

Sets a security level to restrict access to certain menus.

<SI>An

where n specifies the menus that can be accessed.

4X30

n=0

EasyCoder PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n=0

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

117

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Cutter, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3400C 3400D 3400e 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 = Disables the cutter 1 = Enables the cutter 0 = Disables the cutter 1 = Enables the cutter 0 = Disables the cutter 1 = Enables the cutter 0 = Disables the cutter 1 = Enables the cutter 0 = Disables the cutter 1 = Enables the cutter 0 = Disables the cutter 1 = Enables the cutter 0 = Disables the cutter 1 = Enables the cutter 0 = Disables the cutter 1 = Enables the cutter This option is available on the EasyCoder F4 with IPL version 1.4. Notes

Turns the cutter feature on or off if the cutter option is installed. Reset the printer after sending this command.
<SI>cn

where n enables or disables the cutter.

Dark Adjust, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n -10 to +10 (in increments of 1) Notes This command changes the configuration setting.

Sets the dark adjust command. This command controls the print darkness on the labels.
<SI>dn

where n specifies the darkness setting.

Notes:

The darkest setting is +10 (darkest) and the lightest setting is -10 (lightest).

118

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up

Purpose: Syntax: Selects Emulation or Advanced printer operating mode on power-up.
<SI>Cn

where n specifies the mode and mil. Printers:

Printer 3240 Default n=3 Values for n 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 3 = Advanced mode (2.5 mil) 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 200 dpi: 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 400 dpi: 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 3 = Advanced mode (2.5 mil) 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 3 = Advanced mode (2.5 mil) 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) You can use Advanced mode 2.5 mil option only on the 3400e with the 400 dpi option. Notes

3400

n=1

3400e

200 dpi: n=1 400 dpi: n=3

3440

n=3

3600

n=1

4100 4400

n=1 n=1

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

119

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Emulation or Advanced Mode on Power-Up (continued)

Printer 44X0 Default 4420: n=1 4440: n=3 Values for n 4420: 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 4440: 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 3 = Advanced mode (2.5 mil) 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) 0 = Emulation mode (10 mil) 1 = Advanced mode (5 mil) 2 = Emulation mode (15 mil) Notes You can use Advanced mode 2.5 mil option only on the 4440.

7421

n=1

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n=1

Notes:

Emulation mode lets you print labels that were designed on an 86XX printer in multiples of 10 or 15 mil. Advanced mode lets you print bar code labels in multiples of 2.5 or 5 mil.

End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set

Purpose: Sets the end-of-print skip distance. This distance is a value in 5 mil increments that the label advances after printing or when you pause printing.
<SI>D[n]

Syntax:

where n is the distance in 5 mil increments (3.3 mil increments on 4X30 printers).

120

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

End-of-Print Skip Distance, Set (continued) Printers:

Printer 3240 3400 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i PM4i Default n=0 n = 118 n=0 n = 118 n=0 n = 123 n=0 n = 123 n=0 n = 118 n=0 n = 118 n=0 n = 141 n=0 n = 132 n=0 n = 94 n=0 n = 160 n=0 n = 103 n=0 n = 100 Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock Mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock Mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Label Stock mode Continuous Stock mode Values for n 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments 0 to 9999 in 5 mil increments

Notes:

To advance the label out to the tear bar in label stock mode, set n to the Continuous Stock mode value. If you enter a value for n, it applies to both Continuous mode and Label Stock mode, regardless of the mode in which you enter the value. If you do not specify a value for n, the <SI>D command returns the printer to the default. This command is ineffective in self-strip applications.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

121

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

IBM Language Translation, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 = Disable IBM translation 1 = Enable IBM translation Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Turns the IBM language translation feature on or off.

<SI>in

where n enables or disables IBM translation.

Notes:

This feature allows IBM compatible characters to replace standard ASCII characters based on the current printer language (see your printer users manual for international character sets). This command overrides the language translation based on the current printer emulation.

Intercharacter Delay, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All except the EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, and PM4i Default n=0 Values for n 0 to 9999 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Sets the intercharacter delay. The intercharacter delay is the time delay between characters in a message the printer transmits.
<SYN>n

where n is the intercharacter delay in milliseconds.

122

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Interlabel Ribbon Save, Enable or Disable

Purpose : Syntax: Printers:
Printer 4100 Default n=0 Values for n 0 = Disable interlabel ribbon save 1 = Enable interlabel ribbon save Notes If you do not have the ribbon save option installed, the printer ignores this command.

Enables or disables the interlabel ribbon save feature on the 4100 printer.
<SI>sn

Label Rest Point, Adjust

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments -20 (farthest back) to +20 (farthest forward) -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments -30 (farthest back) to +30 (farthest forward) in 5 mil increments

Adjusts the point at which labels stop for removal. Use this command for self-strip and cutter applications.
<SI>fn

where n specifies the label stop point.

Notes:

You can also set this command by using the control panel or Test and Service DIP switches. For help, see your printer users manual.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

123

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Label Retract, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=1 Values for n 0 = Disables label retract 1 = Enables label retract Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Turns the label retract option on or off.

<SI>Rn

where n enables or disables the label retract option.

Notes:

If you select die-cut label stock, the printer determines the retract distance automatically. If you select continuous label stock, the printer uses the retract distance set by the Set Label Retract Distance (Label Retract Distance, Set) command. See also the Select Label Stock Type (Label Stock Type, Select) command.

Label Retract Distance, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 4400 All other printers Default n = 284 n = 216 (6.5 mil printhead) n=0 Values for n 0 to 399 0 to 399 All other printers support this command the same way. Notes

Sets the label retract distance.

<SI>rn

where n specifies the label retract distance in 5 mil increments.

Notes:

This command works with continuous label stock only. The label retracts to this distance at the start of a print.

124

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Label Stock Type, Select

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=1 Values for n 0 = Continuous label stock (no breaks between labels) 1 = Label stock with gaps between labels 2 = Label stock with marks between labels (on back of label stock) Notes All printers support this command the same way.

Selects the type of label stock.

<SI>Tn

where n specifies the type of stock.

Notes:

To make this command effective, reset the printer or turn the power off and on again after issuing the command.

Label Width, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Sets the label width to n in dot increments.
<SI>Wn

where n is a number between the minimum and maximum number of dots for your printer. Calculations for all printers (except the 4440 printer) use a 5 mil dot. Printers:
Printer 4400 Default n = 896 n = 672 (6.5 mil printhead) 4420: n = 896 4440: n = 1792 Values for n 50 to 896 or 50 to 672 4420: 50 to 896 4440: 100 to 1792 Notes This command is effective upon execution. This command is effective upon execution. For the 4440 printer, n must be calculated using 2.5 mil dot. This command is effective upon execution.

44X0

7421

n = 832

50 to 832

Notes:

(44X0 only) When you print narrower labels, set this command to reduce torque. You may need to experiment with this command until your labels print properly. In high humidity environments, you may also want to use the Takeup Motor Torque, Increase command.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

125

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Maximum Label Length, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default n = 1000 n = 1000 n = 1000 n = 1000 n = 1000 n = 1000 n = 1000 n = 1000 n = 1000 n = 1200 Values for n 100 to 4800 100 to 4800 100 to 4800 100 to 4800 100 to 4800 200 to 4800 100 to 4800 200 to 4800 100 to 4800 100 to 4800

Defines the maximum label length.

<SI>Ln

where n specifies the maximum label length in 5 mil increments.

Notes:

The printer uses this number for detecting media faults. It does not use this number to limit the image size of a format on the label.

126

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Media Fault Recovery Mode, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3400e 4420 4440 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 = reprints interrupted label 1 = do not reprint interrupted label 0 = reprints interrupted label 1 = do not reprint interrupted label 0 = reprints interrupted label 1 = do not reprint interrupted label 0 = reprints interrupted label 1 = do not reprint interrupted label 0 = reprints interrupted label 1 = do not reprint interrupted label

Sets the media fault recovery mode.

<SI>en

Media Sensitivity, Select

Purpose: Syntax: Selects the media sensitivity of the printer.
<SI>gn[,m]

where n specifies direct thermal (DT) stock or thermal transfer (TTR) stock, and ,m specifies the sensitivity. Printers:
Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3400e Default n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer 0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer 0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer 0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer 0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer 0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer Values for ,m 420 = Direct thermal 567 = Thermal transfer 420 = Direct thermal 567 = Thermal transfer 470 = Direct thermal 567 = Thermal transfer 470 = Direct thermal (2-5 ips) 720 = Direct thermal (6-8 ips) 567 = Thermal transfer 470 = Direct thermal 567 = Thermal transfer 420 = Direct thermal 567 = Thermal transfer Notes You can only set n by using the DIP switches. You can only set n by using the DIP switches. You can only set n by using the DIP switches. You can only set n by using the DIP switches. You can only set n by using the DIP switches. You can only set n by using the DIP switches.

3440 3600

n=0 n=0

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

127

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Media Sensitivity, Select (continued)

Printer 4100 Default n=0 Values for n 0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer Values for ,m 420 = Direct thermal 567 = Thermal transfer Notes You can only set n by using the Transfer On switch on the front of the 4100 printer. This command is effective after you cycle printer power. You can only set n by using the DIP switches.

4400

n=0

0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer 0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer

420 = Direct thermal 567 = Thermal transfer 470 = Direct thermal (2-5 ips) 720 = Direct thermal (6-8 ips) 567 = Thermal transfer N/A

44X0

n=0

4X30

n=0

0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer

The ,m parameter is not available for the 4630 and 4830 printers.

7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n=0 n=0

0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer 0 = Direct thermal 1 = Thermal transfer

180 = Direct thermal 567 = Thermal transfer 420 = Direct thermal 567 = Thermal transfer

Notes:

For help setting ,m, see your printer users manual. This command was called TTR/Direct Thermal Media Grade, Select in the 4630 and 4830 printers users manual.

Message Delay, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Sets the message delay to n milliseconds.
<ESC><SYN>n

where n is the number of milliseconds to delay the start of a printer transmission. Printers:
Printer All except EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 Values for n 0 - 9999 Notes All printers support this command the same way.

128

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Number of Image Bands, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 Default n=3 Values for n 2 to 5 if the printer has 128K of static RAM. 2 to 7 if the printer has expanded RAM. 2 to 6 if the printer has 32K of static RAM. 2 to 12 if the printer has expanded RAM 200 dpi: 2 to 20 with the standard 1 MB of DRAM. 400 dpi: 2 to 9 with the standard 1 MB of DRAM. 2 to 20 if the printer has expanded memory. 3440 n=3 2 to 9 if the printer has 1 MB of DRAM. 2 to 20 if the printer has expanded memory. 2 to 13 if the printer has 128K of static RAM. 2 to 25 if the printer has expanded RAM. 2 to 6 if the printer has 32K of static RAM. 2 to 12 if the printer has expanded RAM. 2 to 10 if the printer has 512K of RAM. Notes This command is effective upon execution. This command is effective upon execution. This command is effective upon execution.

Selects the number of image bands.

<SI>In

where n is the number of image bands.

3400

n=3

3400e

n=3

This command is effective upon execution. This command is effective upon execution. This command is effective upon execution. This command is effective upon execution. This command is effective upon execution.

3600

n=3

4100

n=3

4400

n=3

44X0

n=3

4420: 2 to 20 with the standard 1 MB of DRAM. 4440: 2 to 9 with the standard 1 MB of DRAM. 2 to 20 if the printer has expanded memory.

7421

n=3

2 to 20 if the printer has 512K of DRAM.

This command is effective upon execution.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

129

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Online or Offline on Power-Up

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 4400 4X30 Default n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 = Printer is online on power up 1 = Printer is offline on power up 0 = Printer is online on power up 1 = Printer is offline on power up

Selects the printer to be online or offline when it is turned on.

<SI>On

where n specifies online or offline.

Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Sets the protocol for pin 11/20.
<SI>pn[,m]

where n sets the protocol for pin 20 (DTR) and ,m sets the protocol for pin 11 (PS). Printers:
Printer 3400e 44X0 Default n=0 m=0 Values for n and ,m 0 = The pin follows the software protocol 1 = Always ready (high) 2 = Flow control 3 = Ready/Busy 0 = The pin follows the software protocol 1 = Always ready (high) 2 = Flow control 3 = Ready/Busy The 7421 uses pins 6 and 9 instead of pins 20 and 11. Notes

7421

n=0 m=0

Notes:

When a pin is set to the default, it uses flow control if the serial port is set for XON/XOFF protocol. The pin uses ready/busy if the serial port is set to Intermec Standard protocol. When you set a pin to always ready (high), the pin is held high as long as the printer receives power.

130

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Pin 11/20 Protocol, Set (continued) When a pin is set to flow control, the pin is high when there is room in the data buffer. The pin is held low when the data buffer is full. When a pin is set to ready/busy, the pin is high when the printer status is ready. The pin is held low when the printer is in one of these conditions: Offline Buffer full No label stock Ribbon fault Label at strip pin Printhead hot

Postamble, Set
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n = <NUL> Values for n Any ASCII character Notes When n = <NUL>, the printer does not send a postamble character. All printers support this command the same way.

Sets the postamble character.

<EOT>n

where n specifies the postamble character.

Preamble, Set
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n = <NUL> Values for n Any ASCII character Notes When n = <NUL>, the printer does not send a postamble character. All printers support this command the same way.

Sets the preamble character.

<SOH>n

where n specifies the preamble character.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

131

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Print Speed, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3400e Default n = 30 n = 30 n = 30 Values for n 20, 30, or 40 (corresponding to 2, 3, or 4 ips) 20, 30, 40, or 50 20, 30, 40, 50, or 60 200 dpi: 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 (no self-strip) 20, 30, 40, 50, 60 (with self-strip) 400 dpi: 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 (no self-strip) 20, 30, 40, 50 (with self-strip) 3440 3600 4100 4400 n = 30 n = 30 n = 30 n = 35 20, 30, 40, or 50 20, 30, 40, or 50 20, 30, 40, or 50 5 mil printhead: A number from 25 to 100 in multiples of 5. 6.5 mil printhead: A number from 25 to 85 in multiples of 5. 44X0 n = 30 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 100 (no selfstrip) 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, or 80 (self-strip) 20 to 80 in multiples of 5 20 40, 50, 60, 70, 80

Sets the print speed.

<SI>Sn

where n specifies the print speed.

4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n = 35 n = 20 n = 50

132

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Printer Language, Select

Purpose: Syntax: Selects the printer language.
<SI>ln

where n specifies the language as shown in the next table. Values for n
n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Language USA United Kingdom Germany Denmark France Sweden Italy Spain 8-Bit ASCII Switzerland Code Page 850 Code Page 1250, Central Europe Code Page 1251, Cyrillic, Russian n 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 30 31 32 33 Language Code Page 1252, Latin 1, Western Europe Code Page 1253, Greek Code Page 1254, Turkish Code Page 1255, Hebrew Code Page 1256, Arabic Code Page 1257, Baltic Rim Code Page 1258, Vietnamese Code Page 874, Thai Code Page 932, Shift JIS, Japanese Code Page 936, GB 2312-80, Simplified Chinese Code Page 949, KSC5601, Korean Hangeul Code Page 950, Big 5, Traditional Chinese

Printers:
Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 Default n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 - 10 0-9 0 - 10 0 - 20, 30 - 33 0 - 20, 30 - 33 0 -9 0-9 0-9

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

133

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Printer Language, Select (continued)

Printer 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 - 20, 30 - 33 0 - 10 0 - 10 0 - 20

Notes:

You can only select one printer language per print job. Bitmap user-defined fonts (including bitmap TrueType) do not use code pages. If your label format requires several language fonts, you can bitmap the TrueType fonts. For help, see Creating Bitmap Fonts From TrueType Fonts in Chapter 2. create your own bitmap fonts. For help, see Creating User-Defined Bitmap Fonts in Appendix C. Resident fonts (those that were installed at the factory) use language selections 0 through 10. The default setting will probably provide all the special characters you will need, but you may want to look through the page tables in Appendix B, Character Sets, to determine if one of the other languages (0 through 10) would be more suitable. Code pages 11 through 33 do not work with resident fonts. If you are using a TrueType font (not bitmap), you must match the code page to your language needs. Do not use languages 0 through 10 with scaleable TrueType fonts. If you are using a downloaded scaleable (that is, not bitmap) Japanese, Chinese, or Korean TrueType font, you must first locate the correct code page and download it to your printer. (All others are already stored in your printer.) Select the corresponding code page using the Printer Language, Select command. See Chapter 2 for more information. See Chapter 2 for more information about downloading fonts and code pages. See Appendix B for tables of the various character sets.

134

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Printhead Loading Mode, Select

Purpose: Selects the printhead loading mode that affects how the whole image prints on the label. Mirror Printing mode reverses the order in which data loads into the printhead. Inverse Printing mode causes all pixels that are white to invert to black and vice versa.
<SI>hn[,m]

Syntax: Printers:

Printer 3400C 3400D 3400e 3440

Defaults n=0 ,m = 0 n=0 ,m = 0

Values for n 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Mirror Printing mode 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Mirror Printing mode 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Mirror Printing mode 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Mirror Printing mode 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Mirror Printing mode

Values for ,m 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Inverse Printing mode 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Inverse Printing mode 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Inverse Printing mode 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Inverse Printing mode 0 = Selects normal printing 1 = Selects Inverse Printing mode

44X0

n=0 ,m = 0

7421

n=0 ,m = 0

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n=0 ,m = 0

Note:

The printhead is not under warranty if you use Inverse Printing mode for batch printing. Intermec does not recommend using Inverse Printing mode for batch printing. For best results with Inverse Printing mode, use a maximum print density of 35 percent.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

135

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Printhead Pressure, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 4400 Default n=0 Values for n 0 = Low printhead pressure 1 = High printhead pressure Notes If your labels are slipping, or you notice that the pressure is too light, try changing the pressure to the other setting.

Compensates for variations in the thickness of label stock.

<SI>Hn

Printhead Test Parameters, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Sets the printhead test parameters.
<SI>Un[,m][,p][,q]

where: n ,m ,p ,q Printers:
Printer 4400 Defaults n=0 m = 45 p = 45 q=0 Values for n ,m ,p and ,q n = 0 Printing continues when warning occurs n = 1 Printing stops when warning occurs ,m ,p ,q A number from 45 to 10 A number from 45 to 10 A number from 0 to 9999. Setting q = 0 disables the test. Notes This command is effective upon execution.

determines whether printing continues if the printhead test sends a warning. is the positive threshold of the percentage of the allowable deviation in resistance. is the negative threshold of the percentage of the allowable deviation in resistance. specifies how often (in terms of the number of labels printed) to automatically run the printhead resistance test.

136

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Ribbon Save Zones, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Defines the start and stop points of a ribbon save zone within the label. This command does not enable interlabel ribbon save.
<SI>Zn[,m]

n and ,m are the zone start and zone stop distances, in dot increments, from the detected front of the label. The difference between m and n depends on the speed (number of ips) at which you are printing. Also, m must be bigger than n by at least 100, or the command will be ignored. Printers:
Printer 4100 Notes The ribbon save option must be installed or the printer will ignore this command. Setting a ribbon save zone enables ribbon save. Entering no ribbon save zones clears all ribbon save zones within this label. If only one parameter is entered, the command is ignored. The maximum number of zones possible on one label is 10. This command is buffered up and becomes effective upon execution.

Self-Strip, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400 3440 3600 4100 Default n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 N/A Values for n 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled N/A The 4100 printer ignores this command; however, you can enable self-strip by using the DIP switches. You must install the self-strip option from the control panel before you can enable or disable the label taken sensor. Notes

Turns the self-strip (label taken sensor) option on or off.

<SI>tn

4400

n=0

0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled

44X0

n=0

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

137

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Self-Strip, Enable or Disable (continued)

Printer 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled Notes

Serial Port Configuration, Set

See the Communication Port Configuration, Set command.

Slash Zero, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3400e 44X0e EasyCoder PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled 0 = disabled 1 = enabled

Determines if the regular zero is replaced with a slashed zero.

<SI>zn

Notes:

This command only works if the Printer Language, Select command <SI>1 is set to 0 (USA). Also, it does not apply to OCR fonts 23 and 24.

138

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Takeup Motor Torque, Increase

Purpose: Increases the takeup motor torque from 0 to 50% above the default value. For printers with firmware version 2.5, varies the torque from 75% below to 50% above the default value.
<SI>bn

Syntax: Printers:

Printer 44X0

Default n=0

Values for n 0 to 50 -75 to 50 for firmware version 2.5

Notes: In high humidity environments, you may want to use this command with the Label Width, Set command.

Top of Form, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n = 20 Values for n -10 to 4000 (in 5 mil increments) Notes The negative values for n let you decrease the margin and print closer to the edge of the label.

Sets the top of form (left margin or start print point) to n, which is the distance in 5 mil increments from the label origin to its leading edge.
<SI>Fn

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

139

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Program Mode Commands

You can use Program mode commands to design label formats and to download user-defined fonts and graphics. When creating or editing formats, the printer uses a field pointer to designate the field you are going to modify when the printer is in Program mode. To download commands in Program mode, you must specify the field you want to change. If you do not select a field, the pointer continues to point to the last selected field until you select a different format or field. New formats contain a default human-readable field numbered H0. New pages do not contain a default format. Program mode commands are effective when the printer is in Program mode. You can switch the printer to Program mode with this command:
<STX><ESC>P<ETX>

For help downloading Program mode commands to the printer, see Sending IPL Commands to the Printer in Chapter 1. Note: You must precede each string of commands with the start of message character <STX> and follow it with the end of message character <ETX>. The semicolon (;) is the command terminator. All commands in Program mode must end with this terminator except the last command in a message. The printer ignores parentheses [( )] and <LF> characters.

140

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type

Purpose: Syntax: Selects a symbology for a bar code field.
cn[,m1][,m2][,m3]

n is the symbology and m1, m2, and m3 are modifiers for that symbology. For more information on valid m values, see the information for that symbology in the following pages. Values for n
n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbology Code 39 Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 Code 2 of 5 Codabar Code 11 Code 128 n 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Symbology UPC/EAN Codes HIBC Code 39 Code 16K Code 49 POSTNET PDF417 Code One n 14 15 16 17 18 19 Symbology MaxiCode JIS-ITF HIBC Code 128 Data Matrix QR Code MicroPDF417

Printers:
Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 - 19 0 - 11 0 - 17 0 - 19

n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0

0 - 19 0 - 17 0 - 11 Standard memory 1 - 14 Expanded memory 0 - 11 0 - 19 0 - 12, 14, 16, 17 0 - 19 0 - 12, 14 - 19

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

141

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued)

Code 39
c0[,m]

The default for m is 0. Values for m

m 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description Selects 8646 compatible Code 39. No check digit. Selects 8646 compatible Code 39. Printer enters check digit. Selects 8646 compatible Code 39. Host enters check digit and printer verifies. Selects full ASCII Code 39. No check digit. Selects full ASCII Code 39. Printer enters check digit. Selects full ASCII Code 39. Host enters check digit and printer verifies. Selects 43 character Code 39. No check digit. Selects 43 character Code 39. Printer enters check digit. Selects 43 character Code 39. Host enters check digit and printer verifies.

Intermec printers support three different types of Code 39: 43 character Code 39 Full ASCII Code 39 8646 compatible Code 39 (except the EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i and PM4i) The 8646 compatible version only differs from the full ASCII version by four characters. The $, %, /, and + are encoded as single characters instead of as /D, /E, /O, and /K. The 8646 compatible version allows the printer to be backward compatible with 86XX printers. When you enter <ESC><SPACE> as data, the printer prints the start and stop characters.

Code 93
c1

142

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued)

Interleaved 2 of 5
c2[,m]

The default for m is 0. Values for m

m 0 1 2 Description Selects Interleaved 2 of 5. No check digit. Selects Interleaved 2 of 5. Printer enters check digit. Selects Interleaved 2 of 5. Host enters check digit.

Note: The printer adds a zero to character strings that are odd in length.

Code 2 of 5
c3[,m]

The default for m is 0. Values for m

m 0 1 Description Selects Code 2 of 5. 3-bar start/stop code. Selects Code 2 of 5. 2-bar start/stop code.

Codabar
c4[,m]

The default for m is 0. Values for m

m 0 1,x,y Description Selects Codabar. Host enters start/stop codes and printer verifies. Selects Codabar. Printer enters start code x and stop code y. The values for x and y can range from A to D and from a to d.

Valid start/stop characters range from A to D and from a to d. You can define them as part of the bar code field, or you can download them as part of the print data. Start/stop characters sent down with printer data override the characters defined by the bar code field.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

143

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued)

Code 11
c5[,m]

The default for m is 0. Values for m

m 0 1 2 3 Description Selects Code 11. Printer enters 2 check digits. Selects Code 11. Printer enters 1 check digit. Selects Code 11. Host enters 2 check digits and printer verifies. Selects Code 11. Host enters 1 check digit and printer verifies.

Code 128
c6[,m1][,m2][,m3]

The default for m1, m2, and m3 = 0. Values for m1 and m2

m1,m2 0,0 0,1 1,0 1,1 Description Selects Code 128, keep parentheses and spaces. Selects Code 128, ignore parentheses and spaces in the bar code but keep them in the interpretive field. Selects UCC-128 Serial Shipping Container Code. Selects UCC-128 Serial Shipping Container Code and keep parentheses and spaces in interpretive field.

In Emulation mode, you can print the Function 1 character by entering <SUB> 1. In Advanced mode, you can print the Function 1 character by entering <SUB><SUB> 1. You can print the characters for Function 2, 3, and 4 in the same way. UCC-128 serial shipping container code automatically starts in subset C with a <FNC1>. It is a fixed length version of Code 128 requiring you to enter 19 numeric characters. The printer forces the first two characters to zero.

144

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) Values for m3

m3 0 1 2 3 Description Recommended. Automatically selects start character. Starts in subset A. Starts in subset B. Starts in subset C.

Note: Intermec recommends that you set m3 to 0 unless you are familiar with Code 128 subsets. The printer will automatically determine the correct start subset and perform any necessary switching between subsets. ,m3 is valid only in the EasyCoder PF4i and PM4i printers with firmware version 2.10 and higher and ,m1 must equal 0. If you set m3 to a number other than 0, only characters within the chosen subset are valid. If you enter characters from another subset, the printer generates an error code 11 (invalid bar code data) and the bar code will not print. To switch to another character subset within the bar code Enter:
<SUB><SUB>n

where n is A, B, or C depending on if you want to switch to subset A, B, or C. Or, where n is S and the current subset is A or B. The next one character is shifted from the current subset into the other subset (A or B). Then, the following characters will return to the current subset. If you set n equal to S and the current subset is C, this command is ignored.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

145

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued)

UPC/EAN
c7[,m1][,m2]

The default for m1 and m2 is 0. Values for m1

m1 0 1 2 3 Description Selects UPC/EAN Codes. Printer enters check digit. Flag 1 enabled. Selects UPC/EAN Codes. Printer enters check digit. Flag 1 disabled. Selects UPC/EAN Codes. Host enters check digit and printer verifies Flag 1 enabled. Selects UPC/EAN Codes. Host enters check digit and printer verifies. Flag 1 disabled.

Values for m2
m2 0 1 2 3 4 Description variable length EAN 8 EAN 13 UPC Version A UPC Version E m2 5 6 7 8 9 Description UPC Version D1 UPC Version D2 UPC Version D3 UPC Version D4 UPC Version D5

The variable length option selects the UPC/EAN version by the number of characters in the data field. The number of data characters and check characters allowed for each version are:
EAN 8 EAN 13 UPC version A UPC version E UPC version D1 UPC version D2 UPC version D3 UPC version D4 UPC version D5 7 data + 1 check character 12 data + 1 check character 11 data + 1 check character 6 data + 1 check character 13 data + 1 check character 18 data + 2 check characters 22 data + 2 check characters 25 data + 3 check characters 29 data + 3 check characters

Use a . to delimit the bar code data from the supplemental data. Data to the right of the . is supplemental data; data to the left is bar code data. You can add the two- or five-digit supplemental to any version of the UPC/EAN code.

146

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) The flag 1 option only applies to EAN 8, EAN 13, and UPC version A. For EAN 13, enabling the flag 1 option prints the first character of the bar code interpretive. For EAN 8 and UPC version A, enabling the flag 1 option moves the first and last character of the bar code interpretive outside of the guard bars. UPC Versions D1 - D5 are not supported in the 3400 C/D, 3400e, 4420, 4440, EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i and PM4i printers.

HIBC Code 39
c8[,m1][,m2]

The default for m1 is 0. Values for m1 Conforming to the Supplier Standard

m1 0 1 2[,m2] Description Selects HIBC Code 39. Primary format. Selects HIBC Code 39. Alternate primary format. Selects HIBC Code 39. Secondary format. The linkage character comes from ,m2, which is the field identifier.

Values for m1 Conforming to the Provider Standard

m1 3 4 5[,m2] 6 Description Single format. First data format. Selects HIBC Code 39. Second data format. The linkage character comes from ,m2, which is the field identifier. Selects HIBC Code 39. Multiple data format.

Code 16K
c9

In Emulation mode, use a <SUB> 1 to represent the function 1 character. To represent the function 1 character in Advanced mode, enter <SUB><SUB> 1. Represent the characters for functions 2, 3, and 4 in the same way. To produce a square symbol, specify a height magnification of 1 in Advanced mode. To specify a square symbol, use a height magnification of 250 in Emulation mode.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

147

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued)

Code 49
c10

Use a <SUB> 1 to represent the function 1 character in Emulation mode. In Advanced mode, you can represent the function 1 character by entering <SUB><SUB> 1. You can represent the characters for functions 2, 3, and 4 in the same way. To produce a square symbol, specify a height magnification of 1 in Advanced mode. To specify a square symbol, use a height magnification of 250 in Emulation mode. The printer supports only the alphanumeric (0) and numeric (2) modes.

POSTNET
c11

POSTNET uses the height (h) and width (w) commands in the same way as a font. Other symbologies use h to specify the bar height and w to specify the narrow bar width. POSTNET uses h and w to magnify the base character cell. Each character cell is 13 dots high by 22 dots wide. The default width and height magnification for POSTNET is 2 x 2, resulting in a symbology sized according to the POSTNET specification.

PDF417
c12[[,m1][,m2][,m3]];

PDF417 is a stacked 2D symbology that provides the ability to scan across rows of code. Each row consists of start/stop characters, row identifiers, and symbol characters, which consist of four bars and four spaces each and contain the actual data. This symbology uses error correction symbol characters appended at the end to recover loss of data. Default Parameters for PDF417
Parameter ,m1 ,m2 ,m3 Default 0 9 0 Description The printer selects the number of columns needed to create a symbol that is as close to square as possible. The printer automatically selects the error correction level based on the amount of data. Truncating disabled.

148

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued)

Using ,m1 to Select the Number of Columns

,m1 is the number of columns of data characters. The range for ,m1 is 0 to 30 and the default is 0. If you select zero, the printer provides the number of columns needed to create a symbol that is as close to a square as possible. Note: When you select zero, the printer selects a height magnification that is three times the width magnification. The specifications of PDF417 recommend these magnification values for creating a symbol that you can scan easily.

Using ,m2 to Select an Error Correction Level

,m2 determines the level of error correction. Each level provides a certain number of detection characters, which can detect and recover a specific number of faulty characters. The range for ,m2 is 0 to 9. The default is 9 and allows the printer to automatically select the appropriate level. The level of error correction that works best for your data depends on the amount of characters in your symbols. If you decide to select your own error correction level, you will need to estimate the number of characters since they are formed by compressing the raw data you send to the printer. In general, 1.8 alphanumeric characters generate one symbol character. If you are using numeric data, 2.9 digits generate one data symbol character. Intermec recommends that you leave the error correction level at the default setting of 9. This setting lets the printer select a level, between level 2 and level 5, that provides the most efficient error correction of your data. The printer bases the level selection on the number of symbol characters your data generates. The following table shows the m2 values (error correction levels), the recommended data amount that you should use for each value, and the number of error correction characters that it generates.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

149

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) Values for m2

m2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * Recommended Amount of Data * * 1 - 40 41 - 160 161 - 320 321 - 863 You should only use ,m2 = 0 or 1 if your labels do not have enough space for more error correction characters. Usually, these values are not recommended. The printer reserves ,m2 = 6, 7, or 8 for special applications where the symbol is subject to damage and requires a higher level of error correction. ,m2 = 9 lets the printer set ,m2 to the recommended value for each symbol based on the number of characters. An ,m2 value of 9 is the default setting. Error Detection Characters 2 (error detected, no recovery) 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512

Using ,m3 to Set the Truncate Flag

,m3 is a truncate flag that indicates whether to print the symbol in truncated form. If truncated, the symbols print without right row indicators and with only a one-module wide stop character. The values for ,m3 are 0 to disable truncating and 1 to enable truncating. The default is 0. To minimize errors and maintain the best reading performance, Intermec recommends that you leave ,m3 equal to 0. This table shows the approximate data capacity (maximum number of characters allowed) for the three character sets. Data Capacity per Character Set
Character Set Full ASCII Alphanumeric Numeric Data Capacity 1108 1850 2725

Note: 2D symbols encode data by compressing it in different amounts. Therefore, use these values as guidelines. The exact data capacity varies with the actual data being encoded.

150

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued)

Code One
c13[,[,m1][,m2,m3]]

There are 15 versions of Code One. Each version has a different maximum data length. Code One is a 2D matrix symbology that stores a checkerboard pattern of data directly in a matrix. This feature makes Code One especially useful for applications such as small parts labels, which do not provide sufficient space for linear bar codes. Code One automatically generates error correction symbol characters that it adds to the matrix. In addition to data storage and error correction symbols, each Code One symbol contains a set of horizontal lines in the center, called a finder pattern, that helps the readers quickly locate and identify each symbol. Code One symbols also contain vertical reference bars to help the readers locate the relative positions of each data bit. Code One symbols accommodate varying amounts of data using a different method than other codes. Other codes adjust their size to fit the data exactly. Code One symbols are divided into versions of specific sizes. Each version can accommodate an amount of data from one bit to the maximum amount that will fit into that version. If more data is present than the version can accommodate, the printer will not print the label. Code One symbols cannot be read with a laser scanner. They are read by a digital imager that captures the entire symbol at once instead of scanning each component individually. The imager decodes the components of each Code One symbol after it captures the image, permitting faster data collection. Default Parameters for Code One
Parameter ,m1 ,m2 ,m3 Default 0 1 1 Description Code One version, variable First position in the group Total number of symbols in the group is one symbol

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

151

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued)

Using m1 to Select a Code One Version

m1 is the version of Code One you are printing. Code One selections with all the m1 variables are shown below. The default for m1 is 0. Values for m1
m1= 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Description Code One, variable length (Autoselects from Code One version A to Code One version H) Code One version A Code One version B Code One version C Code One version D Code One version E Code One version F Code One version G Code One version H Code One version S10 Code One version S20 Code One version S30 Code One version T16 Code One version T32 Code One version T48

It is important that you select the correct version of Code One for the data you are encoding. If you try to encode data in the wrong version, your symbol may not print. If your data lengths vary greatly for different labels, or if you are not sure which symbology to select, you can select variable Code One version (,m1 = 0). This version lets the printer choose the correct version of Code One (from A to H) based on the data length. If you know your data lengths are consistent, or if the printer always chooses the same version, you should manually select the Code One version to save printer memory. You may notice that part of your Code One symbols do not contain data. This occurs because each version of Code One has a fixed size, and the version large enough to accommodate all of your data may be larger than you need. This situation does not mean that you should use a version of a smaller size, because if it is too small to accommodate your data, the symbol will not print.

152

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) This table shows the data lengths that each Code One version accommodates. Note: In this table, the data lengths approximate the maximum amount of data for each version of Code One. The printer compresses the data before it encodes it, which shortens the length of the amount you send. This condition should not affect printing, but if you select the variable length, the printer may select a Code One version that is smaller than the one listed next to your data length. Data Lengths for Code One Versions
,m1 Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 * Code One Type variable* A B C D E F G H S10 S20 S30 T16 T32 T48 Encodes only numeric data. 10 24 38 13 34 55 Full ASCII 10 19 44 91 182 370 732 1480 Alphanumeric 13 27 64 135 271 553 1096 2218 Numeric 22 44 104 217 435 886 1755 3550 6 12 18 22 55 90

The printer selects the correct Code One type based on the data length.

Note: For full ASCII and alphanumeric columns, the maximum number of characters is actually less than those listed for each version of Code One. That number varies depending upon the number of character type changes (lowercase to uppercase, numeric to alphanumeric, and so on). The more shifts between these different types, the less data you can encode.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

153

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued)

,m2 and ,m3 define symbols that are part of a group. ,m2 is the position of the current symbol in the group, and ,m3 is the total number of symbols in the group. For example, setting ,m2,m3 to ,2,5 indicates that the current symbol definition is the second in a group of five. Both ,m2 and ,m3 range from 1 to 15, with a default of 1. Note: If you are using groups of symbols with the ,m2 and ,m3 variables, make sure ,m2 (the position in the group) is never greater than ,m3 (the total number of symbols in the group). The printer does not check to ensure that you define all positions of a group. For example, if you set ,m3 to 5, and you define only three positions, the printer prints the three. When you scan these symbols, the scanner waits for all five symbols and will not be able to transmit the data.

Using ,m2 and ,m3 to Group Symbols

Defining Height and Width for Code One

Code One modules must be square; therefore, when you define a field for Code One, you only need to enter one value for both the height and width magnification. If you enter more than one value, the printer uses the last value for both height and width and ignores all previously entered magnification values. If you do not enter a value, the printer uses a default value of 3 for both height and width magnification.

Using Groups of Code One Symbols

Use groups of Code One symbols to encode data so that you can scan separate symbols more efficiently. When you scan a group of symbols, the scanner accumulates the data from all members of the group and transmits the data as if it came from a single symbol.

MaxiCode
c14[,m1]

MaxiCode is a fixed-size 2D symbology where the printer ignores height and width magnification. This symbology is made up of offset rows of hexagonal elements, each of which is 35 mils wide by 40 mils high, arranged around a bulls-eye finder pattern. Each hexagon represents one bit of information and is either black or white depending on the state of the encoded data bit. United Parcel Service (UPS) developed MaxiCode for the specific purpose of encoding information about a parcel.

154

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) This table lists the possible values for ,m1. The default value autodiscriminates between Modes 2, 3, and 4. Note: If you have developed previous applications using Mode 0, your printer will still support your application; however, we recommend using Mode 2 or 3 for new applications. Values for m1
m1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Structured Carrier Message for numeric postal codes up to 9 digits Structured Carrier Message for alphanumeric postal codes up to 6 characters Standard Symbol Full Enhanced Error Correction (EEC) Reader Programming

When you select MaxiCode, you must format your data to conform to the five fields described in the next table. Note: The header only applies to Structured Carrier Message (Modes 2 and 3). The Structured Carrier Message header is optional. MaxiCode Fields
Field Description of Field 1 Header (optional) 2 3 4 5 Postal code Country code Service class Secondary Message Number of Characters Nine Six or nine Three Three 84 Default None None 840 (U.S.) 999 None

p
IPL.018

Notes:

The NULL character is not supported. If the NULL character appears in the user data, you will lose it along with any following data. All control characters (<RS>, <GS>, <EOT>, etc.) must be preceded by a <SUB> character, as illustrated in the following examples.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

155

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) This example illustrates the command for MaxiCode Mode 2:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E1;F1<ETX> <STX>H0;o10,10<ETX> <STX>B1;o100,300;f1;c14,2;h6;w6;d0,100<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX> <STX>MaxiCode Sample Mode 2<CR><ETX> <STX>[)><SUB><RS>01<SUB><GS>01982039280<SUB><GS>840<SUB> <GS>001<SUB><GS>1Z94924221455215<SUB><RS>Intermec 6001 36th Ave West Everett, WA 98203<SUB><EOT><ETX> <STX><ETB><ETX>

This example illustrates the command for MaxiCode Mode 3:

<STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E1;F1<ETX> <STX>H0;o10,10<ETX> <STX>B1;o100,300;f1;c14,3;h6;w6;d0,100<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>E1<CAN><ETX> <STX>MaxiCode Sample Mode 3<CR><ETX> <STX>[)><SUB><RS>01<SUB><GS>96T51654<SUB><GS>484<SUB> <GS>066<SUB><GS>1Z00000256<SUB><RS><SUB><EOT><ETX> <STX><ETB><ETX>

JIS-ITF
c15[,m]

The default for m is 0. Values for m

m 0 1 2 Description Selects 5 dot narrow bar width magnification. Selects 8 dot narrow bar width magnification. Selects 10 dot narrow bar width magnification.

The next command defines a data source for the current field and how many characters are in the field.
d[n][,m]

The default for n,m is 0,14.

156

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) Values for n

n d0[,m] d2[,m] d3[,m] Description This field receives data from a host. The ,m is the data length, which can be set to 6 (condensed), 14 (standard), and 16 (extended). This field acts as a slave field and receives its data from another field (master slave). The ,m is the master slave field ID. The printer defines the data during Program mode (fixed). The ,m determines the JIS-ITF type. If the data length is not exactly 6, 14, or 16, the printer uses the next highest JIS-ITF type with zero padding in front.

The JIS-ITF bar code is the Japanese Industry Standard for Interleaved 2 of 5. JIS-ITF bar codes are in a box of solid black that measures 4.75 mm (0.19 in) and always include an interpretive field [21 x 14O CR-B (JIS x 9001)] centered beneath the bar code field. Valid narrow bar width magnifications are 5, 8, and 10 dots. Due to printhead dot size limitations, the printer cannot achieve a true 2.5 to 1 ratio when using a narrow bar width of 5 dots. The printer uses a wide bar width of 12 dots for a true 2.4 to 1 ratio instead. JIS-ITF bar code fields consist of these three categories: standard, condensed, and enlarged. If you are not using the command to define the source of the field data, the printer automatically chooses a category. If your bar code field contains 14 characters, the printer uses standard JISITF. If your field contains 6, the printer uses the condensed version, and if your field contains 16, the printer uses the enlarged version.

HIBC Code 128

c16[,m1][,m2]

The default for m1 is 0. Values for m1 Conforming to the Supplier Standard

m1 0 1 2,m2 Description Selects HIBC Code 128. Primary format. Selects HIBC Code 128. Alternate primary format. Selects HIBC Code 128. Secondary format. The linkage character comes from ,m2, which is the field identifier.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

157

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) Values for m1 Conforming to the Provider Standard
m1 3 4 5,m2 6 Description Single format. First data format. Selects HIBC Code 128. Second data format. The linkage character comes from ,m2, which is the field identifier. Selects HIBC Code 128. Multiple data format.

Data Matrix Symbology Versions ECC-100 and ECC-200

c17[,m1][,m2][,m3,m4[,m5,m6]]

Data Matrix is a 2D matrix symbology made up of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. The finder pattern is a perimeter to the data region and is one module wide. Two adjacent sides are solid dark lines. These lines are used to define physical size, orientation, and symbol distortion. Intermec supports these two versions of Data Matrix: ECC-100 and ECC-200. Use ECC-200 for new applications. Data Matrix Default Parameters
Parameter ,m1 ,m2 ,m3 ,m4 ,m5 ,m6 Default 200 0 0 ,m3 1 1 Description ECC-200 Square Position of current symbol in group Total number of symbols in group File identifier File identifier

,m1 is a three-digit number that selects the Data Matrix version. Possible values are: 100 (ECC-100) 200 (ECC-200) Note: The EasyCoder F4, Pf2i, PF4i, and PM4i printers only support ,m1 = 200. ,m2 is a one-digit value that indicates whether your symbol will be square or rectangular. The amount of data you enter determines the size of the symbol. Possible values are: 0 = square 1 = rectangular

158

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) Use ,m3, ,m4, ,m5, and ,m6 when you define Structured Append symbols within ECC-200. Structured Append Parameter Values for Data Matrix
Parameter ,m3 ,m4 ,m5 ,m6 Description The position of the current symbol in the group The total number of symbols in the group File identifier File identifier Possible Values 0 - 16 0 - 16 1 - 254 1 - 254

For example, setting ,m3,m4,m5,m6 to 2,5,1,43 indicates that the current symbol definition is the second in a group of 5 with the file identifier of 1,43. If you do not set ,m3 or you set it to 0, you disable Structured Append mode. If you do not set ,m5 or ,m6, the settings default to 1,1. Notes: This table lists how many numeric, alpha, or 8-bit characters you can place in a Data Matrix bar code for each version. Character Capacity for Data Matrix Versions
Type of Character All numeric All alpha All 8-bit ECC-100 88 59 38 ECC-200 3116 2335 1556

QR Code
c18[,m1][,m2][,m3]

QR Code is a matrix 2D symbology that encodes data into patterns consisting of black and white dots or modules. A three position detection pattern enables omni-directional reading and ultra high-speed reading. QR Code can handle a wide range of data, including numerical, alphabetical, Kanji, Hiragana, Katakana, graphics, and control codes. A built-in error correction function enables the QR Code to repair errors in the code.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

159

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) Values for m1, m2, m3

Parameter ,m1 ,m2 Default 2 M Description QR model Error correction level Possible Values 1 = Model 1 2 = Model 2 L = 7% correction M = 15% correction Q = 25% correction H = 30% correction 0-7 = Mask type 8 = Auto-selection of mask by printer

,m3

Mask number

Notes:

You can only create QR symbols up to 3550 characters.

MicroPDF417
c19[,m1][,m2]

MicroPDF417 is a 2D symbology, derived from PDF417. You use MicroPDF417 for applications needing improved area efficiency but without the requirement for PDF417s maximum data capacity. MicroPDF417 replaces PDF417s 17-module-wide start/stop patterns and left/right row indicators with a unique set of 10-module-wide Row Address Patterns, which were designed both to reduce overall symbol width and to enable linear scanning at row heights as low as 2X. MicroPDF417, unlike PDF417, may only be printed in certain defined combinations of number of data columns (m1) and number of data rows (m2), up to a maximum of 4 data columns by 44 data rows. Values for m1 and m2
Parameter m1 Default 0 Description Sets the number of data columns in the printed symbol. The default setting (0) allows the printer to determine the most efficient size for given data. Possible values are 0 through 4. Sets the number of data rows in the printed symbol. The default setting (0) allows the printer to determine the most efficient size for given data. Possible values depend on the setting for m1.

m2

160

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bar Code, Select Type (continued) MicroPDF417 uses the following symbol sizes (data columns x data rows), each with a distinct error correction capacity:
1x11 1x14 1x17 1x20 1x24 1x28 2x8 2x11 2x14 2x17 2x20 2x23 2x26 3x6 3x8 3x10 3x12 3x15 3x20 3x26 3x32 3x38 3x44 4x4 4x6 4x8 4x10 4x12 4x15 4x20 4x26 4x32 4x38 4x44

Bar Code Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 - 199 Notes The ,name parameter is optional. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but cannot start with a numeric character.

Edits or creates a bar code field.

Bn[,name]

Notes:

When you create a bar code field, you automatically create an interpretive field if you have enabled the Interpretive parameter. Bar Code Field Default Parameters
Parameter Field origin Field direction Bar code type Check digits Prefix Data length Ratio Interpretive Height magnification Width magnification Syntax o f c Default 0,0 0 degrees Code 39 Disabled None 20 3 to 1 Disabled 50 1

r i h w

The printer generates an error code (38) if the field number is out of range.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

161

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 Default n=1 bitmap fonts Values for n 1 - 999 Notes n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height. 1 - 799 n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height. 200 dpi: 1 - 799 400 dpi: 1 - 1599 n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height. 1 - 1599 n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height. 1 - 599 n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height.

Defines the height of a graphic or user-defined font.

yn

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics 3400 n=1 bitmap fonts

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics 3400e n=1 bitmap fonts

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics 3440 n=1 bitmap fonts

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics 3600 n=1 bitmap fonts

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics

162

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bitmap Cell Height for Graphic or UDF, Define (continued)

Printer 4100 Default n=1 bitmap fonts or graphics Values for n 1 - 599 1 - 799 (with expanded memory) Notes n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height. n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height. 4420: 1 - 799 4440: 1 - 1599 n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height. 1 - 599 n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height. 1 - 799 n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height. 1 - 799 n is the number of rows for a graphic or font (bitmap). For outline fonts, n represents the height of the base character in number of dots. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid height.

4400

n=1

bitmap fonts

1 - 599

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics 44X0 n=1 bitmap fonts

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics 4X30 n=1 bitmap fonts

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics 7421 n=1 bitmap fonts

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i n=1 bitmap fonts

n = 10 outline fonts n = 50 graphics

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

163

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define

Purpose: Defines the maximum width for a graphic or any character in a font. Each character has a width within this amount, which should be at least as wide as the widest character in the font. n is the number of columns for the UDC, bitmap, or user-defined font. For outline fonts, n represents the width of the base character in number of dots.
xn

Syntax: Printers:

Printer 3240

Default n=1 bitmap fonts or graphics bitmap fonts or graphics bitmap fonts or graphics bitmap fonts or graphics bitmap fonts or graphics bitmap fonts or graphics bitmap fonts or graphics bitmap fonts or graphics bitmap fonts or graphics

Values for n 1 - 999 With expanded memory: 1 - 1999 1 - 799

Notes The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width.

n = 10 outline fonts 3400 n=1

n = 10 outline fonts 3400e n=1 200 dpi: 1 - 799 400 dpi: 1 - 1599 1 - 1599

n = 10 outline fonts 3440 n=1

n = 10 outline fonts 3600 n=1 1 - 599

n = 10 outline fonts 4100 n=1 1 - 599 With expanded memory: 1 - 799 4420: 1 - 799 4440: 1 - 1599 1 - 599

44X0

n=1

n = 10 outline fonts 4400 n=1

n = 10 outline fonts 4X30 n=1 1 - 599

n = 10 outline fonts

164

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Bitmap Cell Width for Graphic or UDF, Define (continued)

Printer 7421 Default n=1 bitmap fonts or graphics bitmap fonts or graphics Values for n 1 - 799 Notes The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width. The printer generates an error code (52) for an invalid width.

n = 10 outline fonts EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i n=1 1 - 799

n = 10 outline fonts

Bitmap User-Defined Font, Clear or Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default N/A Values for n 3 to 6 and 8 to 19 Notes The ,name parameter is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters.

Clears or creates a user-defined bitmap font set. The font ID number is n.

Tn[,name]

Notes:

If you have already defined font set n, the printer erases all previous characters in the font. You can recreate an existing font, but you cannot edit it. To change any characters, you must transmit the entire font set.

Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 Default n=0 no borders (black letters) n=0 no borders (black letters) n=0 no borders (black letters) Values for n 0 - 199 Notes When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field.

Defines a border around a human-readable field.

bn

3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D

0 - 199

0 - 999

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

165

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Border Around Human-Readable Text, Define (continued)

Printer 3400e Default n=0 no borders (black letters) no borders (black letters) no borders (black letters) no borders (black letters) no borders (black letters) no borders (black letters) no borders (black letters) no borders (black letters) no borders (black letters) Values for n 0 - 999 Notes When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field. When n is greater than 0, field prints white letters with n dot size border around the field.

3440

n=0

0 - 999

3600

n=0

0 - 199

4100

n=0

0 - 199

4400

n=0

0 - 199

44X0

n=0

0 - 999

4X30

n=0

0 - 199

7421

n=0

0 -999

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n=0

0 - 999

Box Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 - 199 Notes The ,name parameter is optional. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but cannot start with a numeric character.

Accesses or creates a box field.

Wn[,name]

166

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Box Field, Create or Edit (continued) Notes: The next table describes the box field parameters. Box Field Parameter Descriptions
Parameter Field origin Field direction Box length Box height Box width Syntax o f l h w Default 0,0 0 degrees 100 100 1

Character Bitmap Origin Offset, Define

Purpose: Defines the offset, to the right, of all characters in a font. If you define each characters width in columns, with the first column numbered 0, then the origin of each character is at the column with the same number as n. For example, n = 2 shifts the character origins over two columns to the right.
Xn

Syntax: Printers:

Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

Default n=0 n=0 n=0

Values for n 0 - 599 0 - 599 0 - 800

Notes Use this command only with bitmap fonts. Use this command only with bitmap fonts. Use this command only with bitmap fonts.

n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0

0 - 800 0 - 599 0 - 599 0 - 599 0 - 800 0 - 599 0 - 800 0 - 800

Use this command only with bitmap fonts. Use this command only with bitmap fonts. Use this command only with bitmap fonts. Use this command only with bitmap fonts. Use this command only with bitmap fonts. Use this command only with bitmap fonts. Use this command only with bitmap fonts. Use this command only with bitmap fonts.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

167

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 Default n=0 n=1 character rotation bar code ratio Values for n Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise Notes If the bar code width is odd and you select r0, the printer substitutes r1. The narrow elements of this code are always at least 3 dots, therefore select a width of w = 1 to have the shortest symbol.

Defines the character rotation for human-readable fields, or the bar code ratio for a bar code field.
rn

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1

3400A 3400B

n=0 n=1

character rotation bar code ratio

Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1 n = 3 applies to Code 39 for a ratio of 7 dots to 3 dots.

3400C 3400D 3400e

n=0 n=1

character rotation bar code ratio

Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 n=3 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1 2.3 to 1

168

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define (continued)

Printer 3440 Default n=0 n=1 character rotation bar code ratio Values for n Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise Notes

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 n=3 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1 2.3 to 1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise

3600

n=0 n=1

character rotation bar code ratio

Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1

4100

n=0 n=1

character rotation bar code ratio

Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1

4400

n=0 n=1

character rotation bar code ratio

Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

169

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Character Rotation or Bar Code Ratio, Define (continued)

Printer 44X0 Default n=0 n=1 character rotation bar code ratio Values for n Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise Notes

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 n=3 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1 2.3 to 1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise

4X30

n=0 n=1

character rotation bar code ratio

Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1

7421

n=0 n=1

character rotation bar code ratio

Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 n=3 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1 2.3 to 1 horizontal 90 counterclockwise

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n=0 n=1

character rotation bar code ratio

Human-readable fields: n=0 n=1

Bar code fields, ratios of wide element to narrow element: n=0 n=1 n=2 n=3 2.5 to 1 3.0 to 1 2.0 to 1 2.3 to 1

170

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Code 39 Prefix Character, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default No prefix Values for n A to Z (uppercase only) and 0 to 9 Notes Enter the prefix after you select Code 39. For example, enter c0,3;pABC4; rather than pABC4;c0,3;. When you enter the @ character as n1, it clears all prefixes. Prefix characters do not appear in the interpretive field.

Defines the prefix for a Code 39 field. The prefix is only valid for Code 39 fields.
p[n1][n2][n3][n4];

Command Tables, Load

Purpose: Downloads a command table, with t as the command table identifier. This command table identifier is followed by the nibblized command entries (c1-cn) to be loaded into the table. The printer expects two hex digits for every entry in the table.
C[t], [command 1], [command 2], ..., [command n]

Syntax: Printers:

t is the command table identifier.

Printer All except the EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i, and 7421

Default N/A

Values for t 0 = Print mode commands 1 = Escape print commands 2 = Shift print commands 3 = Status response 4 = Protocol characters

Notes Data must be nibblized ASCII characters ranging from 0 to 9 and A to F.

Notes:

New commands become effective after you reset the printer or turn the power off and back on. For help, see Appendix D, User-Defined Interface Tables. To change an entry in the table, you must send the entire table to the printer as a string of ASCII characters in hexadecimal form. Any entry that you do not redefine retains its old value. To modify only a few commands, send the <ESC>Z command, capture the output, modify it, and send it back to the printer.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

171

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Current Edit Session, Save

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Saves the current page, format, UDC, or UDF being edited. The printer remains in Program mode.
N

The printer automatically saves the current page, format, or UDC when you call a new one or when you exit Program mode.

Data Source for Format in a Page, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All except 4X30 Default n=0 m1 = a m2 = 0 Values for n 0 - format receives its data during Print mode 1 - format is a slave of another format within this page. Notes The format ID must be the same for both the master and slave formats. For the 4X30, this command was called Format Page Position, Define Data Source. All values are the same.

Defines a data source for a format assigned to a page position.

en[,m1][,m2]

m1 is the position of the master format within the page. m2 is the data offset to apply to the slave format. You can only offset data that is delimited by numeric field separator <FS> or alphanumeric field separator <GS>.

Field, Delete
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 -199. Notes You cannot delete the last field in a format. If you delete the current field, the field pointer points to the next field. If you delete a master field, you also delete all slave fields of that master field.

Deletes field n from the format.

Dn

172

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Field Data, Define Source

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 Default 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields 3400 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields 3440 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields 3600 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields 4100 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields 4400 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields Values for n 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data Values for m1 (d0 or d1) 0 - 3550

Defines a data source for the current field and how many characters are in the field.
dn[,m1][,m2]

0 - 3550

0 - 3550 (incl. 2D fields)

0 - 3550

0 - 250

0 - 250

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

173

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Field Data, Define Source (continued)

Printer 44X0 Default 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields 4X30 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields 7421 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i 0,20,0 Bar code fields 0,30,0 Humanreadable fields Values for n 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data 0 = Data entered in Print mode 1 = Data entered in Print mode 2 = Data comes from field ,m1 3 = Fixed data Values for m1 (d0 or d1) 0 - 3550

0 - 3550

0 - 3550

0 - 3550

The syntax for this command is illustrated in these examples.

d0[,m1] d1[,m1];

Enter optional data in Print mode. ,m1 is the maximum amount of data that you can enter into this field. The default for ,m1 is 20 characters for bar code fields, and 30 characters for human-readable fields.
d2,m1[,m2];

Copy data into this field from field ,m1. You must define the field before you can use it. ,m2 is an optional positive integer numeric field offset that can range from 0 to 9999, with 0 as the default. You can only offset data delimited by numeric field separator (FS) or alphanumeric field separator (GS). A bar code field cannot copy data from a human-readable field, but a human-readable field can copy data from a bar code field.
d3,m1;

Fixed data m1 is stored as part of the format, and you use it every time you print the current field. You cannot change entered data with print commands.

174

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Field Direction, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 = Horizontal 1 = Rotated 90 counterclockwise from horizontal 2 = Rotated 180 counterclockwise from horizontal 3 = Rotated 270 counterclockwise from horizontal

Defines the field rotation.

fn

Field Origin, Define

Purpose: Defines the origin for a field. The field origin is the upper left corner of the field. Horizontal n and vertical m locations represent the number of dots from the labels origin. The origin (0,0) is the upper left square on the label.
on,m

Syntax: Printers:

Printer All

Default n=0 ,m = 0

Values for n and m n = 0 to 19999 ,m = 0 to 19999

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

175

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Font Character Width, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 Default Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Values for n 1 - 999 With expanded memory: 1 - 1999 1 - 799 Notes For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. 200 dpi: 1 - 799 400 dpi: 1 - 1599 1 - 1599 For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. 1 - 599 For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. 1 - 599 With expanded memory: 1 - 799 1 - 599 For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command.

Defines the amount of space from the origin of one letter to the origin of the next. If n is too small, characters may overlap.
Zn

3400

3400e

3440

3600

4100

4400

176

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Font Character Width, Define (continued)

Printer 4420 Default Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Characters bitmap width, minus the font character offset (Xn) plus the intercharacter space (zn) Values for n 1 - 799 Notes For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. 1 - 1599 For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. 1 - 599 For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. 1 - 799 For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command. 1 - 799 For bitmap characters only. The printer ignores the intercharacter space command (zn) if you use it with this command.

4440

4X30

7421

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

177

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Font Type, Select

Purpose: Syntax: Selects a font type for human-readable fields.
cn[,m]

where: n ,m Printers:
Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400D 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i EasyCoder PF4i, PM4i Default n=0 n=0 n=0 Values for n 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 24 0 to 25, 30 to 41, 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 25, 30 to 41 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 24 0 to 25 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41 50 to 56 with the Kanji option 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41 0 to 26, 28, 30 to 41, 61 to 70 Values for m -199 to 199 -199 to 199 -199 to 199

is the font ID number. is the intercharacter gap (the space between characters). If you do not specify ,m, the printer uses the default value of the selected font.

n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0

-199 to 199 -199 to 199 -199 to 199 -199 to 199 -199 to 199 -199 to 199 -199 to 199 -199 to 199 -199 to 199 -199 to 199

178

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Font Type, Select (continued) Notes: You can set n to a number from 0 to 56 for human-readable fields, depending on the fonts your printer supports. The next table includes values for n and the font name associated with it. Values for n
n 0 1 2 3-6 7 8 - 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Font Name 7 x 9 Standard (86XX font) 7 x 11 OCR (86XX font) 10 x 14 Standard (86XX font) User-defined fonts 5 x 7 Standard (86XX font) User-defined fonts 8 point monospace 12 point monospace 20 point monospace OCR A OCR B size 2 Swiss Mono 721 standard outline font Swiss Mono 721 bold outline font Dutch Roman 801 proportional outline font 6 point monospace bold 8 point monospace bold 10 point monospace standard 10 point monospace bold 12 point monospace bold 16 point monospace standard 16 point monospace bold 20 point monospace bold n 38 39 40 41 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 Font Name 24 point monospace standard 24 point monospace bold 30 point monospace bold 36 point monospace bold Kanji outline font Kanji monospace outline font Katakana 12 x 16 bitmap Katakana 16 x 24 bitmap Katakana 24 x 36 bitmap Kanji 16 x 16 bitmap Kanji 24 x 24 bitmap Swiss 721 Swiss 721 bold Swiss 721 bold condensed Prestige bold Zurich extra condensed Dutch 801 bold Century Schoolbook Futura light Letter Gothic DingDings

For more information about fonts, see the Printer Language, Select command in this chapter. For more information about designing and using fonts, see Chapter 2 and Appendix C.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

179

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Format, Create or Edit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 Default N/A Values for n 1 - 99 Notes n is the format ID number. The ,name parameter is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but cannot start with a numeric character. n is the format ID number. The ,name parameter is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but cannot start with a numeric character. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer does not store the label format in permanent memory. When you turn the printer off, the printer loses the label format. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer does not store the label format in permanent memory. When you turn the printer off, the printer loses the label format. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer does not store the label format in permanent memory. When you turn the printer off, the printer loses the label format. n is the format ID number. The ,name parameter is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but cannot start with a numeric character. n is the format ID number. The ,name parameter is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but cannot start with a numeric character. n is the format ID number. The ,name parameter is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but cannot start with a numeric character. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer does not store the label format in permanent memory. When you turn the printer off, the printer loses the label format.

Edits or creates a format.

An[,name]

or Fn[,name]

3400A 3400B

N/A

1 - 19

3400C 3400D

N/A

*, 1 - 19

3400e

N/A

*, 1 - 99

3440

N/A

*, 1 - 99

3600

N/A

1 - 19

4100

N/A

1 - 19

4400

N/A

1 - 19

44X0

N/A

*, 1 - 99

180

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Format, Create or Edit (continued)

Printer 4X30 Default N/A Values for n 1 - 19 Notes n is the format ID number. The ,name parameter is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters, but cannot start with a numeric character. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer does not store the label format in permanent memory. When you turn the printer off, the printer loses the label format. If you use an asterisk (*) for the label format, the printer does not store the label format in permanent memory. When you turn the printer off, the printer loses the label format.

7421

N/A

*, 1 - 99

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

N/A

*, 1 - 99

Notes:

The printer generates an error code (36) if the format number is out of range.

Format Direction in a Page, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 = Horizontal 1 = Rotated 90 counterclockwise from horizontal 2 = Rotated 180 counterclockwise from horizontal 3 = Rotated 270 counterclockwise from horizontal

Defines the format directions within a page.

qn

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

181

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Format, Erase
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Values for n 1 - 99 1 - 19 1 - 99 1 - 99 1 - 19 1 - 19 1 - 19 1 - 99 1 - 19 1 - 99 1 - 99 Notes You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0. You cannot erase format 0.

Erases format ID number n.

En

Format Offset Within a Page, Define

Purpose: Defines the format offsets within a page and creates new origins for fields within a format by adding the format offsets to the original field offsets. m and n represent increments of dot sizes.
On,m

Syntax: Printers:

Printer All

Default n=0 ,m = 0

Values for n 0 - 19999

Values for ,m 0 - 19999

Format Page Position, Define Data Source

See the Data Source for Format in a Page, Define command.

182

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Format Position From Page, Delete

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default p=a Values for p a to z

Deletes the format position p from a page. p is the page position.

mp

Format Position in a Page, Assign

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 43X0 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i Default p=a p=a p=a p=a p=a p=a p=a p=a p=a p=a p=a Values for p a to z a to z a to z a to z a to z a to z a to z a to z a to z a to z a to z Values for ,n 0 - 19 0 - 19 0 - 99 0 - 99 0 - 19 0 - 19 0 - 19 0 - 99 0 - 19 0 - 99 0 - 99

Assigns the format n to page position p. n is the numeric format ID, and p is the page position.
Mp,n

Notes:

A format may be in multiple positions. The printer generates an error code (36) if the format ID is out of range.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

183

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Graphic, Select
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 - 99 Notes This applies to a graphic field only.

Selects a graphic for graphic fields. cn

Graphic or UDC, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400 3400e 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 Default N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Values for n 1 - 999 With expanded memory: 1 - 1999 1 - 799 200 dpi: 1 - 799 400 dpi: 1 - 1599 1 - 1599 1 - 599 1 - 599 With expanded memory: 1 - 799 1 - 599 4420: 1 - 799 4440: 1 - 1599 1 - 599 These printers do not support Emulation mode. Notes

Maps one column of bitmap for a graphic or a font character. n is the column to be mapped.
un,m...m

7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

N/A N/A

1 - 799 1 - 799

In Emulation mode, m...m is a string of 1s and 0s that make up the column and specify whether or not to print in that row element of the column (m = 1 prints, m = 0 does not). Any unmapped columns or row elements default to m = 0. In Advanced mode, each data byte m represents 6 bits of the bitmap.

184

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Values for n: Human-readable fields and graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics 1 - 999 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 (graphics) 1 - 400 (human readable fields) 1 - 1999 (bar codes) 1 - 9999 (box fields) 1 - 250 (graphics) 1 - 400 (human readable fields) Values for n: Bar codes and box fields 1 - 1999 (bar codes) 1 - 9999 (box fields)

Defines box, bar code, or UDC height magnification. For bar code and box fields, define the height n in number of dots.
hn

Printer 3240

Default n = 50 n=2 n=1 n = 100 Box height

3400A 3400B

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

3400C 3400D

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

3400e

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

3440

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

185

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define (continued)

Values for n: Human-readable fields and graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics Bar code height POSTNET and human-readable fields Graphics 1 - 999 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 9999 1 - 999 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 9999 1 - 250 1 - 9999 1 - 250 (graphics) 1 - 400 (human readable fields) Values for n: Bar codes and box fields 1 - 1999 (bar codes) 1 - 9999 (box fields)

Printer 3600

Default n = 50 n=2 n=1 n = 100 Box height

4100

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

4400

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

44X0

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

4X30

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

7421

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

n = 50 n=2 n=1

n = 100 Box height

186

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Height Magnification of Bar, Box, or UDC, Define (continued) Notes: For human-readable fields, graphics, and the POSTNET symbology, n represents the vertical magnification of the character bitmap. If you set n to a number that is too large, the printer uses the highest value it can support. In Advanced Mode, a dot is 5 mil for a 200 dpi printer and 2.5 mil for a 400 dpi printer. For the 4X30 printers, a dot is 3.3 mil.

Human-Readable Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 - 199 Notes The ,name parameter is an optional field. You can use eight ASCII characters (not counting the semicolon) and cannot start with a number.

Edits or creates a human-readable field.

Hn[,name]

Notes:

The parameters for the default field are listed in the next table. Parameters for the Default Field
Parameter Field origin Field direction Character rotation Font Height magnification Width magnification Pitch Point Border Data origin Data length Syntax o f r c h w g k b d Default 0,0 0 degrees 0 degrees 7 x 9 standard 2 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled Print mode 30

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

187

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Intercharacter Space for UDF, Define

Purpose: Defines the amount of space added to the default intercharacter gap length for a bitmap font. The number of dots you select for n define the intercharacter gap length.
zn

Syntax: Printers:

Printer 3240 3400 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

Default n=2 n=2 n=2 n=2 n=2 n=2 n=2 n=2 n=2 n=2

Values for n 0 - 199 0 - 199 0 - 199 0 - 199 0 - 199 0 - 199 0 - 199 0 - 199 0 - 199 0 - 199

Notes The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn). The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn). The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn). The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn). The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn). The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn). The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn). The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn). The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn). The printer ignores this command if you use it with the font character width command (Zn).

Notes:

The printer generates an error code (52) for invalid lengths. The unit for n is in number of dots per pixels. In Advanced Mode, a dot is 5 mil for a 200 dpi printer and 2.5 mil for a 400 dpi printer. For the 4X30 printers, a dot is 3.3 mil.

188

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Interpretive Field, Edit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 - 199 Notes n is the field ID number of the bar code field to be interpreted.

Edits an interpretive field.

In

Notes:

You cannot create interpretive fields with this command; you can only create or delete them when enabling the interpretive of the corresponding bar code field. The parameters for the default field are listed in the next table. Parameters for the Default Field
Parameter Field origin Field direction Character rotation Font Height magnification Width magnification Pitch Point Border Data origin Data length Syntax o f r c h w g k b d Default 2 dots below bar code, left justified 0 degrees 0 degrees 7 x 9 standard 2 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled Print mode 30

Each interpretive field is counted as an individual field in the maximum number of 200 fields (0 199).

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

189

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Interpretive Field, Enable or Disable

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 = Disable 1 = Enable with start and stop characters 2 = Enable without start or stop characters

Determines if the interpretive field of the current bar code field prints.
in

Notes:

When you enable the interpretive field, the human-readable information in the default font (font 0, 7 x 9 standard) prints 2 dots below the bar code field and is left justified. Use the I command to edit an interpretive field.

Length of Line or Box Field, Define

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n = 100 Values for n 1 to 9999

Defines the length of a line or box. You define the length of a line or box field in the number of dots.
ln

Notes:

In Advanced Mode, a dot is 5 mil for a 200 dpi printer and 2.5 mil for a 400 dpi printer. For the 4X30 printers, a dot is 3.3 mil.

190

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Line Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 to 199 Notes The ,name parameter is an optional field. The field can be up to eight ASCII characters.

Accesses or creates a line field.

Ln[,name]

Notes:

The parameters for the default field are listed in the next table. Parameters for the Default Field
Parameter Field origin Field direction Line length Line width Syntax o f l w Default 0,0 0 degrees 100 1

Outline Font, Clear or Create

Purpose: Syntax: Clears or creates an outline font or graphic.
Jn[,name][,type][,size]

where: n ,name ,type ,size is the font or graphic ID. is a string of up to eight ASCII characters (not counting the semicolon) that provides a name for the font or graphic. is the type of the font. defines the size of a TrueType font and is only needed for double-byte fonts that exceed 512K bytes.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

191

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Outline Font, Clear or Create (continued) Printers:

Printer 3240 3400A 3400B 3400C 3400e Values for n 3 to 6, 8 to 19 3 to 6, 8 to 19 3 to 6, 8 to 19 3 to 6, 8 to 19 Values for ,type 0 = Speedo font 0 = Speedo font 0 = Speedo font (default) 2 = Double-byte bitmap font 0 = Speedo font (default) 1 = TrueType font 2 = Double-byte bitmap font 0 = Speedo font (default) 1 = TrueType font 2 = Double-byte bitmap font 0 = Speedo font N/A This command is only available on the 4100 with the addition of expanded RAM. Notes

3440

3 to 6, 8 to 19

3600 4100

3 to 6, 8 to 19 N/A

4400 44X0

3 to 6, 8 to 19 3 to 6, 8 to 19

0 = Speedo font 0 = Speedo font (default) 1 = TrueType font 2 = Double-byte bitmap font 0 = Speedo font (default) 0 = Speedo font (default) 2 = Double-byte bitmap font 1 = TrueType font

4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i,PM4i

3 to 6, 8 to 19 3 to 6, 8 to 19 3 to 6, 8 to 19

Notes:

If you have already defined font set n, the printer erases all previous characters in the font.

192

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Outline Font, Download

Purpose: Syntax: Downloads outline font descriptions.
jnn....nn

where n is the information that describes all characters within the font. You must send the font information to the printer as a string of ASCII characters in hexadecimal form. The printer expects two hex digit bytes for every 8-bit byte of information. Data must be ASCII characters, ranging from 0 to 9 and A to F. All characters are loaded at once, not individually as with bitmap fonts. The description for the whole font can be thousands of characters long; however, the maximum message length is only 255. Therefore, the font description may have to be split between successive j commands. Notes: The printer stores the incoming font description in the font you select with the J command. See Chapter 2 for more information about downloading fonts.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

193

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Page, Create or Edit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default N/A Values for n 1 to 9 Notes You cannot edit the default page (page 0).

Edits or creates a page.

Sn

where n is the numeric page ID.

Notes:

The printer generates an error code (26) if a page number is out of range. The following example illustrates the Page, Create or Edit command:
<STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E1;F1;<ETX> <STX>H0;o1000,100;f3;b10;c0;h3;w2;d0,35<ETX> <STX>H1;o300,250;c0;f3;h3;w3;<ETX> <STX>B2;o250,100;c0;f3;h200;w2;i1;<ETX> <STX>W3;o25,50;l300;h600;w5;<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E2;F2;<ETX> <STX>H0;o800,250;c0;f3;h3;w3;<ETX> <STX>B1;o750,100;c0;f3;h200;w2;i1;<ETX> <STX>W2;o525,50;l300;h600;w5;<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>S1;Ma,1;O0,0;Mb,2;O0,0<ETX> <STX>R<ETX> <STX><ESC>G1<CAN><ETX> <STX><ESC>Ea<ETX> <STX>Example using the page command<CR><ETX> <STX>Format 1<CR><ETX> <STX>Format1<STX> <STX><ESC>Eb<ETX> <STX>Format 2<CR><ETX> <STX>Format2<STX> <STX><US>1<ETX> <STX><RS>1<ETX> <STX><ETB><ETX> <STX><ESC>G0<ETX>

194

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Page, Delete
Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default N/A Values for n 1 to 9 Notes You cannot edit the default page (page 0).

Deletes a page.
sn

where n is the numeric page ID.

Pitch Size, Set

Purpose: Sets the pitch size that defines the size of the characters in human-readable fields. You can only use this command in Advanced mode. When you use the pitch size command, you disable the height and width magnification and point.
gn

Syntax: Printers:

Printer All except the EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

Default n = 12

Values for n 1 to 50

Notes You can use this command for both bitmap and outline fonts. Pitch is characters per line. The higher the pitch, the smaller the characters.

Notes:

Use the pitch size command to scale outline fonts smoothly.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

195

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Point Size, Set

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 3400 3400e Default n = 12 n = 12 n = 12 Values for n 4 - 180 4 - 288 200 dpi: 3 - 288 400 dpi: 3 - 255 3440 3600 4100 4400 44X0 n = 12 n = 12 n = 12 n = 12 n = 12 3 - 255 4 - 288 4 - 212 4 - 212 4420: 3 - 288 4440: 3 - 255 4X30 7421 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i n = 12 n = 12 n = 12 4 - 212 3 - 288 4 - 288 This command works most effectively on fonts c20, c21, c22, and c25. This command works most effectively on outline fonts. This command works most effectively on outline fonts. This command works most effectively on fonts c25, c26, and c27. This command works most effectively on font c25. This command works most effectively on fonts c20, c21, and c22. This command works most effectively on fonts c20, c21, c22, and c25. This command works most effectively on outline fonts. Notes This command works most effectively on fonts c25, c26, and c27. This command works most effectively on outline fonts. This command works most effectively on outline fonts.

Sets the point size that defines the size of the characters in human-readable fields. You can only use this command in Advanced mode.
kn

Notes:

A point size equals 1/72 inch. A higher point size means larger characters.

Print Line Dot Count Limit, Set

Syntax: Notes:
vn

This is a null command and the printer ignores it.

196

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Program Mode, Exit

Purpose: Syntax: Instructs the printer to exit Program mode and enter Print mode. It saves any format or page currently being edited.
R

User-Defined Character, Clear or Create

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default N/A Values for n 0 to 99 Notes The ,name parameter is an optional field of up to eight ASCII characters (not counting the semicolon) and cannot start with a number.

Clears or creates a graphic bitmap.

Gn[,name]

Notes:

If you have already defined graphic n, the printer erases it and redefines it.

User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer All Default n=0 Values for n 0 to 199 Notes The ,name parameter is an optional field of up to eight ASCII characters (not counting the semicolon) and cannot start with a number.

Edits or creates a graphic field.

Un[,name]

Notes:

The parameters for the default field are listed in the next table. Parameters for the Default Field
Parameter Field origin Field direction Character rotation Height magnification Width magnification Syntax o f r h w Default 0,0 0 degrees 0 degrees 1 1

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

197

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

User-Defined Font Character, Create

Purpose: Syntax: Printers:
Printer 3240 Default N/A Values for n 0 - 255 Notes n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters. n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters. n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters. n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters. n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters. n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters. n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters. n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters. n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters. n is the decimal representation of the ASCII character. The printer erases existing characters.

Specifies which font character you will define next.

tn

3400

N/A

0 - 255

3440

N/A

0 - 255

3600

N/A

0 - 255

4100

N/A

0 - 255

4400

N/A

0 - 255

44X0

N/A

0 - 255

4X30

N/A

0 - 255

7421

N/A

0 - 255

EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i

N/A

0 - 255

198

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define

Purpose: Defines the width magnification of a line, box, bar code, or character. You define the width of line, box, or bar code fields by the number of dots that you specify for n. For human-readable fields, graphics and the POSTNET symbology, n is the magnification of the character width.
wn

Syntax: Printers:

Printer 3240

Default n = 1 Line, box, bar code fields and graphics n=2 Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET

Values for n Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 99 Graphics: 1 400 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 250 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 99 Graphics: 1 400 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 250 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 99 Graphics: 1 999 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 999 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 99 Graphics: 1 999 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 999 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 99 Graphics: 1 999 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 999 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 99 Graphics: 1 400 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 250 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 9999 Graphics: 1 250 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 250

3400A 3400B

n=1 n=2

3400C 3400D

n=1 n=2

3400e

n=1 n=2

3440

n=1 n=2

3600

n=1 n=2

4100

n=1 n=2

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

199

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Width of Line, Box, Bar, or Character, Define (continued)

Printer 4400 Default n = 1 Line, box, bar code fields and graphics n=2 44X0 n=1 n=2 4X30 n=1 n=2 7421 n=1 n=2 EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i, PM4i n=1 n=2 Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET Line, box, bar code fields and graphics Human-readable fields and POSTNET Values for n Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 9999 Graphics: 1 250 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 250 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 99 Graphics: 1 999 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 999 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 9999 Graphics: 1 250 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 250 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 99 Graphics: 1 999 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 999 Line and box fields: 1 9999 Bar code fields: 1 99 Graphics: 1 999 HR fields, POSTNET: 1 999

Notes:

In Advanced Mode, a dot is 5 mil for a 200 dpi printer and 2.5 mil for a 400 dpi printer. For the 4x30 printers, a dot is 3.3 mil.

200

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Test and Service Commands

You can use Test and Service commands to query the printer for hardware diagnostic information. Test and Service commands are effective when the printer is in Test and Service mode. You can switch the printer to Test and Service mode with this command:
<ESC>T

For help downloading Test and Service commands to the printer, see Sending IPL Commands to the Printer in Chapter 1. Note: All commands in Test and Service mode end with the command terminator (;), except the last command in a message.

12 Volt Supply Value, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Printer: Transmit the 12 volt supply A/D output back to the host. The range of the value is 00 to 255.
U

4400

Ambient Temperature, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Printer: Transmits the ambient temperature sensor A/D output back to the host. The value ranges from 00 to 255.
A

4400

Command Terminator
Purpose: Syntax: All commands in Test and Service mode must end with the command terminator except for the last command in a message.
;

Dark Adjust
Purpose: Syntax: Printers: This command changes the darkness of the print on your labels. It is for fine-tuning only.
K

3440

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

201

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Factory Defaults, Reset

Purpose: Sets the printer configuration to the factory defaults. When you exit Test and Service mode after sending this command, the printer performs a warm boot (it resets).
D

Syntax:

Use this example to reset the factory defaults:

<STX><ESC>T;D;R;<ETX>

Formats, Print
Purpose: Syntax: Prints all stored formats.
f

Hardware Configuration Label, Print

Purpose: Syntax: Prints a label that provides information about the printers hardware configuration.
h

Label Path Open Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the paper path open switch value back to the host. A value of 0 indicates the paper path is open, and a value of 1 indicates it is closed. On the EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i and PM4i printers, a value of 1 indicates the paper path is open, and a value of 0 indicates it is closed.
L

Syntax: Printers:

Printer 3400A 3400B 3600

Notes This printer ignores this command. This printer ignores this command.

Label Taken Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the label taken sensor A/D output back to the host. The value can range from 00 to 255. On the EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i and PM4i printers, a value of 0 indicates the label is removed, and a value of 1 indicates the label is at the strip pin.
T

Syntax:

202

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Pages, Print
Purpose: Syntax: Prints the pages stored on the printer.
p

Pitch Label, Print

Purpose: Syntax: Prints the pitch label.
C

Print Quality Label, Print

Purpose: Syntax: Prints the print quality program and model number label.
Q

Printhead Resistance Test, Begin

Purpose: Syntax: Printer: Starts the printhead resistance test. The printer will respond with the ASCII character string pass or fail.
B

4400

Printhead Resistance Values, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the average, maximum, and minimum printhead dot resistance value back to the host. Each value is a numeric data string separated by a comma.
S

Syntax: Printer:

4400

Printhead Temperature Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: This command transmits the printhead thermistor A/D output back to the host. The range of the value is 00 to 255.
P

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

203

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

Printhead Volt Supply Value, Transmit

Purpose: Syntax: Printer: Transmits the printhead volt supply A/D output back to the host. The range of the value is 00 to 255.
V

4400

Reflective Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the label mark reflective sensor A/D output back to the host. The value ranges from 00 to 255. The EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i and PM4i will not respond if the paper is moving. For these printers, the values are 0 (label) or 1 (mark).
M

Syntax:

Software Configuration Label, Print

Purpose: Syntax: Prints a label providing software configuration information. s

Test and Service Mode, Exit

Purpose: Syntax: Causes the printer to exit Test and Service mode.
R

Transmissive Sensor Value, Transmit

Purpose: Transmits the label gap transmissive sensor A/D output back to the host. The value ranges from 00 to 255. The EasyCoder F4, PF2i, PF4i and PM4i will not respond if the paper is moving. For these printers, values are 0 (gap) or 1 (label).
G

Syntax:

User-Defined Characters (UDC) and Graphics, Print

Purpose: Syntax: Prints the user-defined characters and graphics stored on the printer.
g

204

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

User-Defined Fonts, Print

Purpose: Syntax: Prints the user-defined fonts stored on the printer.
t

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

205

Chapter 7 IPL Command Reference

206

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Full ASCII Table

This appendix contains the full ASCII chart and describes each ASCII control character.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

207

Appendix A Full ASCII Table

Full ASCII Table

This table lists the ASCII characters and their binary, hexadecimal, and Code 39 equivalents.
Binary0 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 00001100 00001101 00001110 00001111 00010000 00010001 00010010 00010011 00010100 00010101 00010110 00010111 00011000 00011001 00011010 00011011 00011100 00011101 00011110 00011111 00100000 00100001 00100010 Hex1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 Decimal 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Code 39 %U $A $B $C $D $E $F $G $H $I $J $K $L $M $N $O $P $Q $R $S $T $U $V $W $X $Y $Z %A %B %C %D %E SP /A /B ASCII2 NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US SP3 ! " Binary0 00100011 00100100 00100101 00100110 00100111 00101000 00101001 00101010 00101011 00101100 00101101 00101110 00101111 00110000 00110001 00110010 00110011 00110100 00110101 00110110 00110111 00111000 00111001 00111010 00111011 00111100 00111101 00111110 00111111 01000000 01000001 01000010 01000011 01000100 01000101 Hex1 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 Decimal 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 Code 39 /C /D /E /F /G /H /I /J /K /L /M /N /O /P4 /Q /R /S /T /U /V /W /X /Y /Z %F %G %H %I %J %V A B C D E ASCII2 # $ % & ' ( ) * + , . / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? @ A B C D E

208

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix A Full ASCII Table

Full ASCII Table (continued)

Binary0 01000110 01000111 01001000 01001001 01001010 01001011 01001100 01001101 01001110 01001111 01010000 01010001 01010010 01010011 01010100 01010101 01010110 01010111 01011000 01011001 01011010 01011011 01011100 01011101 01011110 01011111 01100000 01100001 01100010 Hex1 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 Decimal 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 Code 39 F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z %K %L %M %N %O %W +A +B ASCII2 F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ ` a b Binary0 01100011 01100100 01100101 01100110 01100111 01101000 01101001 01101010 01101011 01101100 01101101 01101110 01101111 01110000 01110001 01110010 01110011 01110100 01110101 01110110 01110111 01111000 01111001 01111010 01111011 01111100 01111101 01111110 01111111 Hex1 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F Decimal 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Code 39 +C +D +E +F +G +H +I +J +K +L +M +N +O +P +Q +R +S +T +U +V +W +X +Y +Z %P %Q %R %S %T5 ASCII2 c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ n6

Notes: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Bit positions are 76543210. Hexadecimal value ASCII character SP is the SPACE character. The Code 39 characters /P through /Y may be interchanged with the numbers 0 through 9. May be interchanged with %X or %Y or %Z. n is the DELETE character.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

209

Appendix A Full ASCII Table

Full ASCII Control Characters Table

This table describes the ASCII control characters.
Control Character NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE Definition Null, or all zeroes Start of Heading Start of Text End of Text End of Transmission Enquiry Acknowledgment Bell Backspace Horizontal Tab Line Feed Vertical Tab Form Feed Carriage Return Shift Out Shift In Data Link Escape Control Character DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US SP DEL Definition Device Control 1 (XON) Device Control 2 Device Control 3 (XOFF) Device Control Negative Acknowledge Synchronous Idle End Transmission Block Cancel End of Medium Substitute Escape File Separator Group Separator Record Separator Unit Separator Space Delete

210

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Character Sets

This appendix contains the extended character set substitution tables available on your printer.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

211

Appendix B Character Sets

International Character Sets

The following tables show which hex codes to download for international characters not available in the U.S. character set. To use the tables, find the hex code for the U.S. character that corresponds with the character in your language.

Advanced Character Table

If you are running your printer in Advanced mode, use this table to find the right hex codes for the international character sets.
23 U.S. ASCII U.K. ASCII Germany France Norway/Denmark Sweden/Finland Spain Switzerland Italy # # # # # 24 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ 40 @ @ @ 5B [ [ 5C \ \ 5D ] ] 5E ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 60 ` ` ` ` ` ` 7B { { 7C 7D } } 7E ~ ~

8636/46 Character Table

This table shows the hex codes for the character sets that print if your printer is running under 86XX emulation mode.
23 U.S. ASCII U.K. ASCII Germany France Norway/Denmark Sweden/Finland Spain Switzerland Italy # # # # Pt # # 24 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ 40 @ @ @ @ 5B [ [ 5C \ \ 5D ] ] 5E ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 60 ` ` ` ` ` ` 7B { { 7C 7D } } 7E ~ ~ ~ ~

212

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix B Character Sets

IBM Translation Character Table

This table shows the hex codes for the international character sets that print if your printer is running with Translation enabled.
21 U.S. ASCII U.K. ASCII Germany France Norway/Denmark Sweden/Finland Spain Switzerland Italy ! ! ! ! ! ! 23 # # # # 24 $ $ $ Pt $ $ 40 @ @ @ 5B $ # [ 5C \ \ \ \ 5D ! ! ] 5E ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 60 ` ` ` ` ` ` 7B { { { 7C 7D } } } 7E ~

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

213

Appendix B Character Sets

Code Page 850 Character Table

This table shows the character set that prints if your printer has Code Page 850 selected as the printer language. Note: Some Intermec printers do not support Code Page 850. For more information, see the Printer Language, Select command in Chapter 7.

04

00

01

02

03

05

06

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

!
20 21

22

"

#
23

$
24

%
25

&
26

'
27

(
28

)
29

+
2B

,
2C

2A

0
30

1
31

2
32

3
33

4
34

5
35

6
36

7
37

8
38

9
39

:
3A

;
3B

<
3C

@ A B C D E F G H I
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

49

4A

4B

K L M N O
4C 4D 4E 4F 5C

P Q R S T U V W X Y
59

5A

Z [ j

5B

`
60

61

a b 62 r
72 82

63

64

d e f66 g 65 67 u
75 85

68

69

6A

6B

6C

l m n o 6D 6E 6F }
7D 7E

p q
70 71 80 81

s t
73 74 83 84

v w
D6 77 E6 87

x y
78 79 88 89

z
7A 8A

{
7B 7C 8B 8C

90 91

94

97 98 99 9A

92

93

95 F6

9B

9C

X
9D 9E AD

A0

A1

A2

A3 B3

A4

a o
A5 A6 A7

A8 B8

A9 B9

AA

1 /2 AB

1 /4 AC

B0

B1

B2

B4

B5 B6 B7
C5 C6

BA

BB

BC

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

CC

D0

D D2 D3 D4
D1 E1 E2 E3 E4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

DA

DB

DC

E0 E5 F0

E6

E7

y
E8 E9 EA EB F8 F9 FA FB

EC

F1

F2

3 4
F3

F4

F5

F6 F7

FC

214

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 1D 0E 1E 0F 1F

2D

.
2E 2F

=
3D

>
3E

?
3F

]
5D 5E

5F

7F

8D

8E

8F
9F

AE

AF

BD

BE CE

BF

CD

CF

DD

Y -

DE

DF

ED

EE

EF

FD

FE

FF

IPL019.eps

Appendix B Character Sets

Extended Character Sets

Each internal font in the printer has a different character set associated with it as shown in the following tables. The hex codes accompany each character. You must set the serial port communication to 8 data bits to use the extended character sets. Characters in Fonts
c0 c1 c2 c7 7x9 Standard 7x11 OCR 10x14 Standard 5x7 Standard

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

5A

5B

5C

5D

5E

5F

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

8E

8F

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

9A

9B

9C

9D

9E

9F

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

B9

BA

BB

BC

BD

BE

BF

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

CC

CD

CE

CF

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D9

DA

DB

DC

DD

DE

DF

E1

E2

E3

E4

E5

E6

E7

E8

E9

EA

EB

EC

ED

EE

EF

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

FA

FB

FC

FD

FE

FF
IPL020.eps

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

215

Appendix B Character Sets

Characters in Fonts
c20 c21 c22 8 point 12 point 20 point

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

!
2 21

" # $ % &
22 23 24 25 26 27

(
28

)
29

*
2A

+
2B

,
2C

2D

.
2E

/
2F

0
3

1
31

2
32

3
33 43

4
34 44

5
35 45

6
36

7
37 47

8
38 48

9
39

:
3A

;
3B

<
3C

=
3D 4D

>
3E 4E

?
3F 4F

@
4

A
41 51

B
42 52

C D E T
54 53 55

F
46 56

G H W X
57 58

I
49

J
4A

K
4B

L
4C

M N O ]
5D 5E

P
5

Q R S a
61

U V e
65

Y
59

Z
5A

[
5B

\
5C

_
5F

`
6

b
62

c
63

d
64

f
66

g
67

h
68

i
69

j
6A

k
6B

l
6C

m n
6D 6E

o
6F

p
7

q
71

r
72

s
73

t
74

u
75

v
76

w x
77 78

y
79

z
7A

{
7B 7C

}
7D

7E 7F 8E 8F

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

9A

9B

9C

9D

9E

9F

A A1

A2

A3

A4 A5

| |

A6

A8

A9

a
AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

B B1

2
B2

3
B3

B4

B5 C5

B6 C6

A7

B8

1
B9

0
BA

BB

1 4
BC

1 2
BD

3 4
BE

BF

B7

C D

C1 D1

C2 C3 D2 D3

C4 D4

C7 C8

C9 CA D8 DA

CB DB

CC DC

CD DD

CE

CF

D
E

D5

D6 E6

D7

D8

EA

Y
EC

I
DE

DF

E1

E2

E3

E4

E5

E7

E8

E9

EB

ED

EE

EF

~ o
F

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

FA

FB

FC

y
FD

Io
FE

FF

IPL022.eps

216

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix B Character Sets

Characters in Font
c23 OCR A

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

5A

5B

5C

5D

5E

5F

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

8E

8F

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

9A

9B

9C

9D

9E

9F

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

B9

BA

BB

BC

BD

BE

BF

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

CC

CD

CE

CF

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D8

DA

DB

DC

DD

DE

DF

E1

E2

E3

E4

E5

E6

E7

E8

E9

EA

EB

EC

ED

EE

EF

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

FA

FB

FC

FD

FE

FF
IPL024.eps

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

217

Appendix B Character Sets

Characters in Font
c24 OCR B Size 2

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

1A

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

2A

2B

2C

2D

2E

2F

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

3A

3B

3C

3D

3E

3F

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

4A

4B

4C

4D

4E

4F

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

5A

5B

5C

5D

5E

5F

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

6A

6B

6C

6D

6E

6F

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

7A

7B

7C

7D

7E

7F

81

82

83

84

85

86

87

88

89

8A

8B

8C

8D

8E

8F

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

9A

9B

9C

9D

9E

9F

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

A9

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B8

B9

BA

BB

BC

BD

BE

BF

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

CA

CB

CC

CD

CE

CF

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

D8

D8

DA

DB

DC

DD

DE

DF

E1

E2

E3

E4

E5

E6

E7

E8

E9

EA

EB

EC

ED

EE

EF

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

FA

FB

FC

FD

FE

FF

IPL025.eps

218

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

This appendix explains how to create user-defined bitmap fonts and graphics.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

219

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics

You can create user-defined graphics (user-defined characters, or UDCs) in two ways: one bit per byte or six bits per byte. To use the UDC in a format, you must first define a graphic field using the IPL command Un[,name]. For help using the Un[,name] (User-Defined Character Field, Create or Edit) command, see Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference.

Creating One Bit Per Byte User-Defined Graphics

One bit per byte is the standard graphic format used for downloading to an Intermec 8636/8646 printer. You can download a one bit per byte graphic to the printer when it is in 86XX Emulation mode. A one bit per byte bitmap image is an arrangement of ones and zeros that looks similar to the following example. Example of One-Bit Per Byte Bitmap Image
Bitmap Pattern 000000010000000 000000111000000 000001011100000 000010011110000 000100011111000 001000011111100 010000011111110 100000011111111 010000010000010 001000010000100 000100010001000 000010010010000 000001010100000 000000111000000 000000010000000 Row Row 0 Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Row 5 Row 6 Row 7 Row 8 Row 9 Row 10 Row 11 Row 12 Row 13 Row 14

If you look closely at the bitmap pattern above, you can see that it is the outline of a diamond with a line down the middle and the upper right corner blacked in.

220

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

To create your own graphic 1 Draw your design on a piece of graph paper:

IPL.027

2 Convert each of the squares to either a one or a zero (the zeros are blanks and the ones are dots), and type it into a text file column by column. When you send the file to the printer, a character in the file represents either a dot or a blank when the image prints.
U U14

ooooooo oooooo I ooooo I o oooo I oo ooo I ooo oo I oooo o I ooooo I oooooo o I ooooo oo I oooo ooo I ooo oooo I oo ooooo I o oooooo I ooooooo

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

ooooooo I oooooo I I ooooo I I I oooo I I I I ooo I I I I I oo I I I I I I o ooooo I o oooo I oo ooo I ooo oo I oooo o I ooooo I oooooo ooooooo
IPL.028

I I I I I I I

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

221

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

3 Read the pattern of ones and zeros down each column starting at the top left corner. The first column on the left becomes the data for the u0 command line, the second column becomes the data for the u1 command line, and so on. Type this into a text file:
U, U1, U2, U3, U4, U5, U6, U7, U8, U9, U10, U11, U12, U13, U14,

222

ooooooo oooooo I ooooo I o oooo I oo ooo I ooo oo I oooo o I ooooo I oooooo o I ooooo oo I oooo ooo I ooo oooo I oo ooooo I o oooooo I ooooooo
IPL.029

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

ooooo I o oooo I oo ooo I ooo oo I oooo o I ooooo I oooooo ooooooo ooooooo oooooo ooooo oooo
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ooo I I oo I I I o I I I I

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

4 Ensure that the printer is in 86XX Emulation mode, and then add the protocol characters and define the bitmap as a user-defined graphic. The following example gives the graphic the number 3, the name diamond, the dimensions 15 rows by 15 columns, and adds the ASCII characters necessary for the printer to understand the graphic. Example of Defining a Bitmap as a User-Defined Graphic
Command Line <STX><ESC>c<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>G3,diamond;x15;y15;<ETX> <STX>u0,000000010000000;<ETX> <STX>u1,000000101000000;<ETX> <STX>u2,000001000100000;<ETX> <STX>u3,000010000010000;<ETX> <STX>u4,000100000001000;<ETX> <STX>u5,001000000000100;<ETX> <STX>u6,010000000000010;<ETX> <STX>u7,111111111111111;<ETX> <STX>u8,011111110000010;<ETX> <STX>u9,001111110000100;<ETX> <STX>u10,000111110001000;<ETX> <STX>u11,000011110010000;<ETX> <STX>u12,000001110100000;<ETX> <STX>u13,000000111000000;<ETX> <STX>u14,000000010000000;<ETX> <STX>R;<ETX> Description Selects 86XX mode Enter Program mode Create UDC bitmap 3 (diamond) Define column 0 Define column 1 Define column 2 Define column 3 Define column 4 Define column 5 Define column 6 Define column 7 Define column 8 Define column 9 Define column 10 Define column 11 Define column 12 Define column 13 Define column 14 Save and exit to Print mode

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

223

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Graphics

The six bits per byte format is more compact than one bit per byte. When you use six bits per byte, you can download large graphics more quickly. The printer must be in Advanced mode (2.5 mil or 5.0 mil) to use the six bits per byte format. The only difference between 2.5 mil and 5.0 mil mode is the size of the image when it prints. The arrangement of the bits is very important in this format. Eight bits (0 through 7) compose every byte, but the printer only uses bits 0 through 5 to map the image. You must always set bit 6 (the seventh bit) to 1 so you can download data to the printer. 7-bit hosts reserve bit 7 (the eighth bit) for parity and compatibility, so the range of characters for any given UDC is 40 hex (@) to 127 hex ( delete character). You can download graphics like the previous one bit per byte (diamond) bitmap example in a six bits per byte format by following the procedure below. Please refer to Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Fonts later in this appendix for an illustrated example of creating a six bits per byte format. To download a six bits per byte graphic 1 Draw the graphic on graph paper. 2 Change the graph paper drawing into a pattern of ones (square is filled in) and zeros (square is empty). 3 Starting from the top row, divide each vertical column into groups of six digits. (If the bottom group has less than six digits, add zeros to this group until it also has six.) The six digits in each group are the six bits that you download in a byte of data. The top digit of each group is bit 0, the bottom digit is bit 5. 4 Add a 1 in the bit 6 position, and then add a 0 in the bit 7 position so that each group now has eight digits. (Eight digits complete the byte.) 5 Starting with the first group of 8 bits in the first column, reverse the order of each group so that bit 0 is now last and bit 7 is first. Work from the top of each column to the bottom. Each eight-digit group is now a binary representation of an ASCII character. 6 Translate each eight-digit group into an ASCII character according to the full ASCII table in Appendix A. 7 Make sure the printer is in Advanced mode and not in 86XX Emulation mode. For help, see the 86XX or Advanced Mode on Power-up command in Chapter 7, IPL Command Reference. 8 Download the graphic so that each column is represented by a command string.

224

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Here is the same format for the diamond shape graphic shown earlier, but this time it is in six bits per byte format with ASCII characters. Example of Six Bits Per Byte Graphic Image
Command <STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>G2,diamond;x15;y15;<ETX> <STX>u0,@B@;<ETX> <STX>u1,@E@;<ETX> <STX>u2,`H@;<ETX> <STX>u3,PP@;<ETX> <STX>u4,H`@;<ETX> <STX>u5,D@A;<ETX> <STX>u6,B@B;<ETX> <STX>u7,<DEL><DEL>G;<ETX> <STX>u8,~CB;<ETX> <STX>u9,|CA;<ETX> <STX>u10,xc@;<ETX> <STX>u11,pS@;<ETX> <STX>u12,`K@;<ETX> <STX>u13,@G@;<ETX> <STX>u14,@B@;<ETX> <STX>R;<ETX> Definition Selects Advanced mode Enter Program mode Create UDC bitmap 2 (diamond), 15 rows by 15 columns Define column 0 Define column 1 Define column 2 Define column 3 Define column 4 Define column 5 Define column 6 Define column 7 Define column 8 Define column 9 Define column 10 Define column 11 Define column 12 Define column 13 Define column 14 Save and exit to Print mode

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

225

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

After downloading the graphic to the printer, download the following format to see how the graphic prints. A label similar to the one following the format prints:
Command <STX><ESC>C<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>E4;F4<STX> <STX>U1;o1050,650;c2;w20;h20; <ETX> <STX>R;<ETX> <STX><ESC>E4<ETX> <STX><ETB><ETX> Definition Selects Advanced mode Enter Program mode Create format 4 Create graphic field 1, origin of 1050,650, use graphic 2, and magnify it by a factor of 20 Save and exit to Print mode Select format 4 Print

IPL.030

226

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Creating User-Defined Bitmap Fonts

There are two ways to create user-defined fonts: one bit per byte format (86XX Emulation mode) or six bits per byte format (Advanced mode).

Creating One Bit Per Byte User-Defined Fonts

In 86XX Emulation mode, the printer receives downloaded fonts in the same manner as the 8636/8646 printers. You create characters column by column, from the top of the column downward. In 86XX Emulation mode, each byte of data represents one bit in the bitmap. The following example lists the commands and data required to define a font with the two characters $ (t36) and i (t105). See Creating One Bit Per Byte User-Defined Graphics earlier in this appendix for more information. Example of User-Defined Font, One Bit Per Byte
Commands <STX><ESC>c<ETX> <STX><ESC>P<ETX> <STX>T11,FONT11<ETX> <STX>x10;y14;<ETX> <STX>t36;Z12;<ETX> <STX>u0,00111110001100;<ETX> <STX>u1,01111111001110;<ETX> <STX>u2,01100011000110;<ETX> <STX>u3,01100011000110;<ETX> <STX>u4,11111111111111;<ETX> <STX>u5,11111111111111;<ETX> <STX>u6,01100011000110;<ETX> <STX>u7,01100011000110;<ETX> <STX>u8,01110011111110;<ETX> <STX>u9,00110001111100;<ETX> <STX>t105;Z4;<ETX> <STX>u4,00110011111111;<ETX> <STX>u5,00110011111111;<ETX> <STX>R;<ETX> Definition Selects 86XX Emulation mode Enter Program mode Create bitmap font 11 Define cell width and height Create character 36 ($), character width is 12 Define column 0 Define column 1 Define column 2 Define column 3 Define column 4 Define column 5 Define column 6 Define column 7 Define column 8 Define column 9 Create character 105 (i), character width is 4 Define column 4 Define column 5 Save and exit to Print mode

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

227

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

Creating Six Bits Per Byte User-Defined Fonts

You can also create bitmaps in Advanced mode. In Advanced mode, each data byte represents six bits in the bitmap. See the following example to create a six bits per byte format like the previous one bit per byte ($ and i) bitmap font examples. To download a six bits per byte format 1 Draw the character on graph paper. 2 Change the graph paper drawing into a pattern of ones and zeros.
u0 o o o o I o I I I I 6 digits
I I I I I I I I I I

u9 o o o o I I I I o
I I I I I I I

o o I I o o I I o o I
I I I I I I I I I I I

o o I I I o o o o I o o o o I I I I o
I I I I I

6 digits

2 digits
(add zeros)

o I I I o o o o o o o o I I o o I I o o o I I I o o o o

o o I I o o I I o o I
I I I I I I I I

I I I I I

o I o o o o
IPL.031

3 Starting with the first column, divide each vertical column into groups of six digits. (If the bottom group has less than six digits, add zeros to this group until it also has six.) The six digits in each group are the six bits that you download in a byte of data. The top digit of each group is bit 0, and the bottom digit is bit 5.

228

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

bit

u0 u1 u2 u3 u4 u5 u6 u7 u8 u9 o o o o I I o o o o o I I I I I I I I o
I I I I I I I I I I

bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit

o o o
I

o o o
I

I I I I I

I I I I I

o o o
I

o o o
I

o o
I

I I

o o
I

I I

o o o o
I I I I

o o o
I I I I I

o o o o
I I I I

o o o o
I I I I

o
I I I I I I I

o
I I I I I I I

o o o o
I I I I

o o o o
I I I I

o
I I I I I I I

o o
I I I I I I

bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit

bit 5 bit 6 bit 7

o o o o o o o
I

o
I

o
I

o
I

o
I I

o
I I

o
I

o
I

o
I

o o o o o
I

o o o o o
I

o o o o o
I

o o o o
I

o o o o
I

o o o o o
I

o o o o o
I

o o o o o
I

o o o o o o o
I

IPL.032

Byte mapping: This illustration shows how to map a character in the six bits per byte format.

4 Add a 1 in the bit 6 position, and then add a 0 in the bit 7 position so that each group now has eight digits. Eight digits complete the byte. 5 Starting with the first group of eight bits in the first column (u0), reverse the order of each group so that bit 0 is now last and bit 7 is first. Work from the top of each column to the bottom. Each eight-digit group is now a binary representation of an ASCII character. Note: In this illustration, each row now represents a column.

bit 7

bit

bit 7

bit

bit 7

bit

u u1 u2 u3 u4 u5 u6 u7 u8 u9

o o o o o o o o o o

I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I oo I I I I I o ooo I I o ooo I I o I I I I I I I I I I I I ooo I I o ooo I I o oo I I I o oo I I oo

o o o o o o o o o o

I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I

I ooo I I oo I I ooo I I ooo I I I I I I I I I I I I ooo I I ooo I I I I I I I I I I I o

o o o o o o o o o o

I I I I I I I I I I

oooooo ooooo I ooooo I ooooo I oooo I I oooo I I ooooo I ooooo I ooooo I oooooo
IPL.033

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

229

Appendix C Creating User-Defined Bitmap Graphics and Fonts

6 Translate each eight-digit group into an ASCII character according to the full ASCII table in Appendix A. u0 = |q@ u1 = ~sA u2 = FcA u3 = FcA u4 = <DEL><DEL>C u5 = <DEL><DEL>C u6 = FcA u7 = FcA u8 = N<DEL>A u9 = L~@ 7 Make sure the printer is in Advanced mode and not in 86XX Emulation mode. 8 Download the font so that you represent each column with a command string. Here are the previously defined characters shown in a six bits per byte format with ASCII characters. Example of User-Defined Font, Six Bits Per Byte
Commands <STX><ESC>C<ETX> <ESC>P;<ETX> <STX>T11,FONT11<ETX> <STX>x10;y14;<ETX> <STX>t36;Z12;<ETX> <STX>u0,|q@;<ETX> <STX>u1,~sA;<ETX> <STX>u2,FcA;<ETX> <STX>u3,FcA;<ETX> <STX>u4,<DEL><DEL>C;<ETX> <STX>u5,<DEL><DEL>C;<ETX> <STX>u6,FcA;<ETX> <STX>u7,FcA;<ETX> <STX>u8,N<DEL>A;<ETX> <STX>u9,L~@;<ETX> <STX>t105;Z4;<ETX> <STX>u0,L<DEL>C;<ETX> <STX>u1,L<DEL>C;<ETX> <STX>R;<ETX> Definitions Selects Advanced mode Enters Program mode Create bitmap font 11 Define cell width (10) and cell height (14) Create ASCII character 36 ($), define character width as 12 Defines column 0 Defines column 1 Defines column 2 Defines column 3 Defines column 4 Defines column 5 Defines column 6 Defines column 7 Defines column 8 Defines column 9 Creates ASCII character 105 (i), define character width as 4 Defines column 0 Defines column 1 Saves and exits to Print mode

230

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

User-Defined Interface Tables

This appendix contains the user-defined interface tables, which you may need when programming with IPL. These tables show commands in the order that you must download them when you replace the User-Defined Command/Protocol characters. A table is shown for each type of command specified by a value for t.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

231

Appendix D User-Defined Interface Tables

Print Commands (t = 0)
This list shows the Print Mode commands in the order you must download them when you are replacing the command codes.
Default Print Command NUL SOH EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US DEL Hex Value 00 01 04 05 06 07 08 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 7F Print Command Description Command Terminator 1 Set Preamble Set Postamble Status Inquiry Select First Data Entry Field Transmit Error Code Warm Boot Command Terminator 2 Status Dump Form Feed Select Next Data Entry Field Label Cut Command Go to Shift Command Table Reset Set Intercharacter Delay Print Clear All Data Abort Print Job Data Shift Go to Escape Command Table Numeric Field Separator Alphanumeric Field Separator Set Quantity Count Set Batch Count Clear Data From Current Field

232

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix D User-Defined Interface Tables

Escape Print Commands (t = 1)

This table lists the <ESC> commands in the order you must download them.
Default Escape Command SYN (space) C D E F G H I L M N O P Q T Z c d e g j k m p u v x y Hex Value 16 20 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 54 5A 63 64 65 67 6A 6B 6D 70 75 76 78 79 Escape Command Description Set Message Delay Enter Start/Stop Character Select Advanced Mode Set Field Decrement Select Format Select Field Select Page Transmit Printhead Parameters Set Field Increment Transmit Label and Gap Length Transmit Software Version Number Disable Increment/Decrement Transmit Options Selected Enter Program Mode Transmit Quantity and Batch Count Enter Test and Service Mode Transmit User-Defined Command Tables Select 86XX Emulation Mode Enable Auto-Transmit 2 Enable Auto-Transmit 3 Select Direct Graphics Mode Enable Auto-Transmit 1 Disable Auto-Transmit 1, 2, and 3 Transmit Static RAM Usage Transmit Configuration Parameters Transmit User-Defined Characters Transmit Font Transmit Format Transmit Page

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

233

Appendix D User-Defined Interface Tables

Shift Print Commands (t = 2)

This list shows the Shift commands in the order you must download them. You must precede these commands with the Go to Shift Command Table command (default value SI) listed in the table of Print Commands (t = 0).
Default Shift Command A C D F H I L N O R S T U W Z a b c d f g h i l p r t Hex Value 41 43 44 46 48 49 4C 4E 4F 52 53 54 55 57 5A 61 62 63 64 66 67 68 69 6C 70 72 74 Shift Command Description Control Panel Access 86XX or Advanced Mode on PowerUp Set End-of-Print Skip Distance Set Top of Form Set Printhead Pressure Set Number of Image Bands Set Maximum Label Length Define Amount of Storage Online or Offline on Power-Up Enable or Disable Label Retract Set Print Speed Select Label Stock Type Set Printhead Test Parameters Set Label Width Set Ribbon Save Zone Audible Alarm Increase Takeup Motor Torque Enable or Disable Cutter Set Dark Adjust Adjust Label Rest Point Select TTR or Direct Thermal Select Printhead Loading Mode IBM Language Translation Select Printer Language Set Pin 11/20 Protocol Set Label Retract Distance Enable or Disable Self-Strip

234

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix D User-Defined Interface Tables

Status Responses and Auto-Transmit Commands (t = 3)

This list contains the status responses and auto-transmit commands in the order you must download them.
Status Command GS SO US US EM DC3 BS SI* FS DC1** DC1** DC1** DC1 Auto-Transmit 1** FS Auto-Transmit 1 BS Auto-Transmit 1 EM Auto-Transmit 1 US Auto-Transmit 1 DC1 Auto-Transmit 2 HT Auto-Transmit 3 SOH Auto-Transmit 3 RS Auto-Transmit 3 Hex Value 1D 0E 1F 1F 19 13 08 0F 1C 11 11 11 11 1C 08 19 1F 11 09 01 1E Status Description Buffer Already Full Printhead Test Fail Label Path Open Ribbon Fault No Label Stock Buffer Now Full Takeup Reel Full Printhead Hot Label at Strip Pin Skipping Printing Ready Clear Label at Strip Pin Takeup Reel Full No Label Stock Ribbon Fault Room in Buffer Imager Overrun Print Job Complete and Buffer Empty Insufficient RAM

*Some older Intermec printers may not support this entry. **The status responses in the above table are for standard protocol. In XON/XOFF protocol, most of the status responses are the same; however, instead of DC1, the status response is DC2, and instead of DC2, the status response is DC4. See your printer users manual for more information about protocols and status responses.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

235

Appendix D User-Defined Interface Tables

Protocol Commands (t = 4)
This list contains the protocol codes in the order you must download them.
Command Characters GS FS EOT ENQ STX ETX ACK NAK DLE DC1 DC3 GS FS EOT ENQ STX ETX ACK NAK DLE DC1 DC3 ENQ VT 20 (ms) (Range: 0 - 255) Hex Value 1D 1C 04 05 02 03 06 15 10 11 13 1D 1C 04 05 02 03 06 15 10 11 13 05 0B 14 Command Description SELECT IN POLL IN RES IN REQ IN SOM IN EOM IN AFF IN NEG IN DLE IN XON IN XOFF IN SELECT OUT POLL OUT RES OUT REQ OUT SOM OUT EOM OUT AFF OUT NEG OUT DLE OUT XON OUT XOFF OUT Proto-Cmd 1 Proto-Cmd 2 Timeout on EOM ACK

236

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix D User-Defined Interface Tables

Communications Protocol Characters

This table shows the characters available for different protocols. Refer to the protocol you are using for your system.
Protocol Characters Select In Poll In Reset In Request for Acknowledgment In Start of Message In End of Message In Acknowledgment In Negative Acknowledgment In Data Line Escape In XON In XOFF In Select Out Poll Out Reset Out Request for Acknowledgment Out Start of Message Out End of Message Out Acknowledgment Out Negative Acknowledgment Out Data Line Escape Out XON Out XOFF Out Status Enquiry In Status Dump In Timeout on EOM ACK ENQ VT NAK DLE DLE DC1 DC3 ENQ VT DC4 DC4 EOT ENQ STX ETX ACK NAK DLE DLE DLE DC1 DC3 GS FS EOT ENQ STX ETX ACK NAK DLE STX ETX STX ETX Standard XON/XOFF Polling Mode D GS FS EOT ENQ STX ETX ACK NAK DLE Multi-Drop GS FS EOT ENQ STX ETX ACK NAK DLE

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

237

Appendix D User-Defined Interface Tables

238

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Using Direct Graphics Mode

This appendix explains how to use Direct Graphics mode, which can significantly reduce the amount of time needed to download and image a graphic.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

239

Appendix E Using Direct Graphics Mode

What Is Direct Graphics Mode?

You can significantly reduce the amount of time necessary to download and image a graphic by using Direct Graphics mode. Direct Graphics mode allows the printer to receive a compressed bitmap graphic and image it directly into the image bands without storing it in the printer. Before you download the graphic, you must compress it into run-length encoded (RLE) data. The data compression greatly reduces the amount of data to download and the rasterized graphic requires minimal processing to image it into the image bands. You no longer need to store the graphic in Program mode and then set up a format in Print mode. When you download a direct graphic to the printer, the printer stores the graphic in the image bands until you clear the label data. set up another format. enter Program mode or Test and Service mode. When printing a label with direct graphics, you must have enough dynamic RAM installed in your printer to contain the entire label. Because Intermec printers normally reuse image bands, you can print long labels with standard RAM; however, when you download direct graphics, the printer retains no information regarding the existence of the graphic in its image bands. Therefore, the printer cannot reuse those image bands when you download a direct graphic. With standard dynamic RAM, you should be able to print almost any label up to 6 inches long. You may need to install expanded dynamic RAM for longer labels.

What Is Run-Length Encoding?

Run-length encoding (RLE) is a method of compressing bitmap graphics. RLE compresses graphics that have repeated runs of white or black dots in a column, reducing the amount of time required to download the graphics to a printer. RLE sends a series of commands that define each bitmap column of a graphic and takes advantage of a series of repeated dots within a column by encoding them as transition commands. Instead of sending the entire column of bitmap data, it sends commands telling the printer how many series of black and white dots to image. If columns are identical, a command can instruct the printer to repeat the last column. RLE is ideal for bar code graphics or designs with simple patterns.

240

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix E Using Direct Graphics Mode

In cases where patterns do not exist, you can send uncompressed bitmap data to the printer. You can mix raw bitmap data and RLE commands to ensure the most efficient way to download a graphic. The RLE file may contain five types of data, each of which is one byte long: Data Types in RLE Files
Type Immediate commands Compression encodation commands Low order data Description Recognized and executed as regular IPL commands or protocol commands Removed from compressed data Used as part of the compressed graphics file to change or set data modes, repeat lines, change the origin for the next lines of data, or end the compress graphics file and return to IPL command printing 7 bits long and may be combined with high order data. 8 bit is always set to 1. Can represent up to 7 bits of data (0-127) Must be preceded by a command byte so the printer knows how to interpret them High order data 6 bits long and always combined with low order data. 7th bit is always set to 1 and 8th bit is always set to 0. When combined with low order data, can represent up to 13 bits of data (0-8191) Must be preceded by a command byte so the printer knows how to interpret them Printer ignores high order data followed by a command or more high order data Bitmap data Composed of uncompressed bytes (7 data bits per byte) that represent columns of your graphic. 8th bit is always set to 1. Byte format (7-0): Range: Data represented: 1xxxxxx 128 - 255 Raw data Byte format (7-0): Range: Data represented: 01xxxxx 64 - 127 0 - 63
th

Byte Format, Range, and Data Represented Byte format (7-0): 000xxxx Range: Data represented: Byte format (7-0): Range: Data represented: Byte format (7-0): Range: Data represented: 0-31 N/A 001xxxx 32 - 63 N/A 1xxxxxx 128 - 255 0 - 127

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

241

Appendix E Using Direct Graphics Mode

How Do I Send a Direct Graphic to the Printer?

Once you have compressed the graphic, use the following commands to send the RLE file to the printer.

Direct Graphics Mode, Enter

Purpose: Default: Syntax: Instructs the printer to receive RLE compressed graphics data in nibblized format. m=0
<ESC>gm

where m specifies the format of the data to follow. m=0 m=1 8 bits per byte. 7 bits per byte of nibblized data.

When you select m = 0, the printer parses subsequent data streams as RLE commands. The printer still recognizes immediate IPL commands. Nonimmediate commands are not parsed. The printer resumes normal IPL parsing when it receives an end of bitmap RLE command. When you select m = 1, the printer receives the RLE compressed graphics data in nibblized format. The printer converts each pair of bytes from ASCII to their numerical equivalent and combines them to form the original byte. For example:
ASCII 1,B Numerical 0x1,0xB Original byte 0x1B

242

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix E Using Direct Graphics Mode

Change Origin
Purpose: Default: Syntax: Tells the printer the X and Y coordinates of the next RLE data column. 0,0
0x21[x,y]

where x and y are the coordinates of the next data column. Values for x and y range from 0 to 8191. The change origin command tells the printer where to place the graphic on the label. If you do not send the command, the printer uses the default setting of 0,0. You can use the command to place different sections of the RLE graphic in different parts of the label. Notes: It is not necessary to use this command for every column. Column-tocolumn transitions are automatic following the end of line command. The default origin of any direct graphic (0,0) is in the lower left corner instead of in the upper left corner. The upper left corner is the label format origin.

End of Bitmap
Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Marks the end of RLE encoded data.
0x28

The printer parses subsequent characters as IPL commands. On the final column of the RLE encoded data, an end of line command does not need to precede the end of bitmap command.

End of Line
Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Causes the printer to assign subsequent bitmap data to the next column.
0x22

The printer images the next data stream in the next column position, incrementing the X position. This command causes an action similar in function to a carriage return.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

243

Appendix E Using Direct Graphics Mode

Raw Bitmap Data Follows

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Indicates raw bitmap data bytes follow.
0x27[data]

The printer only uses the first 7 bits of the data byte. If you set a bit to 1, it prints black. The most significant bit prints farthest to the left. Data order runs from right to left, so the first dot in a column is the least significant bit of the first data byte.

Repeat Last Line

Purpose: Syntax: Notes: Causes the printer to copy the previously defined column n number of times.
0x24n

Values for n range from 0 - 8191. The printer automatically increments the X origin of each column. This command is only valid when preceded by a column of encoded, raw data or an end of line command.

Transition Black
Purpose: Syntax: Transition data follows. The first transition is black.
0x25[data,data,...data]

where data specifies the number of black or white dots. Values for data can range from 0 - 8191. Notes: Each transition data specifies the number of dots to draw (either black or white). Each data alternates black and white dot counts.

Transition White
Purpose: Syntax: Transition data follows. The first transition is white.
0x26[data,data,...data]

Where data specifies the number of black or white dots. Values for data can range from 0 - 8191. Notes: Each transition data specifies the number of dots to draw (either black or white). Each data alternates black and white dot counts.

244

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Appendix E Using Direct Graphics Mode

Using Direct Graphics Commands

This example consists of two parts: a graphic and a line. The origin of the direct graphic is defined the same as the origin of a normal graphic. In this example, the coordinates for the origin of the complex graphic are X0,Y450; however, once you enter Direct Graphics mode, your printer loads the information in the reverse Y direction. Each column of the graphic loads from the bottom to the top. Y coordinates now start at 0 from the bottom left corner and increase in size as the data loads. So, the printer starts loading data for the complex graphic at X0,Y450 and loads up to X0,Y425. Likewise, the data for the line starts loading at X19,Y450 and loads up to X19,Y0.
450

25

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 19

X0, Y0

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Y 10
X
19

Y 10

6 5 4 3 2 1 0

X0,Y450

X19,Y450

3440A.001

Direct Graphics Commands: This example shows how the printer loads information in Direct Graphics mode.

Here is a hex data file for the example above:

1B 90 24 C2 67 22 82 28 30 26 25 21 84 88 80 96 22 43 22 21 C2 22 93 27 26 43 90 8C C2 A8 84 25 D5 22 43

The next table explains the hex data file in the example.

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

245

Appendix E Using Direct Graphics Mode

Hex Data Commands in Example

Data 1B 67 30 21 80 43 C2 Command <ESC>g0 0x21 80 43 C2 Description Enter Direct Graphics mode Change origin 80 - 80 (LO) = 0x00 -> X0 43 - 40 (HI) = 0x03 C2 - 80 (LO) = 0x42 (0x03 0x80) + 0x42 = 1C2 -> Y450 Raw bitmap data follows, starts at Y0 90 - 80 (LO) = 0x10 -> 1 dot at Y4 A8 - 80 (LO) = 0x28 -> 2 dots at Y10 and Y12 D5 - 80 (LO) = 0x45 -> 3 dots at Y14, Y17, and Y20 90 - 80 (LO) = 0x10 -> 1 dot at Y25 End of line Transition white 84 - 80 (LO) = 4 white 96 - 80 (LO) = 22 black End of line End of line Transition white 8D - 80 (LO) = 13 white 84 - 80 (LO) = 4 black End of line Repeat last line 82 - 80 (LO) = 2 times Transition black 89 - 80 (LO) = 9 black End of line Change origin 93 - 80 (LO) = 0x13 -> X19 43 - 40 (HI) = 0x03 C2 - 80 (LO) = 0x42 (0x03 0x80) + 0x42 = 1C2 -> Y450 Transition black 43 - 40 (HI) = 0x03 C2 - 80 (LO) = 0x42 (0x03 0x80) + 0x42 = 1C2 -> Y450 End of bitmap

27 90 A8 D5 90 22

0x27 90 A8 D5 90 0x22

26 84 96 22

0x26 84 96 0x22

22 26 8C 84 22

0x22 0x26 8D 84 0x22

24 82

0x24 82

25 88 22

0x25 88 0x22

21 93 43 C2

0x21 93 43 C2

25 43 C2

0x25 43 C2

28

0x28

246

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Index

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

247

Index

Numbers 12 volt supply value, transmit command, 80, 201 A abort print job command, 80, 86 Advanced mode on power up command, 119 select command, 80, 91 alphanumeric field separator command, 80, 92 ambient temperature, transmit command, 80, 201 amount of storage, define command, 80, 114 ASCII control characters, creating with control codes, 4 table of character equivalents, 208 table of control characters, 210 text file of IPL commands, creating, 6 audible alarm, enable or disable command, 80, 114 auto-transmit 1, 2, 3, disable command, 80, 115 1, enable command, 80, 115 2, enable command, 80, 115 3, enable command, 80, 115 commands, 235 B bar code field create or edit command, 80, 161 definition, 27 sizing, 37 select type command, 80, 141 Codabar, 143 Code 11, 144 Code 128, 144 Code 16K, 147 Code 2 of 5, 143 Code 39, 142 Code 49, 148 Code One, 151 DataMatrix, 158 HIBC Code 128, 157 HIBC Code 39, 147 Interleaved 2 of 5, 143 JIS-ITF, 156 MaxiCode, 154 MicroPDF417, 160 PDF417, 148 POSTNET, 148 QR Code, 159 UPC/EAN, 146 batch count, set command, 80, 93 printing, optimizing with image bands, 56 bitmap cell height for graphic or UDF, define command, 80, 162 cell width for graphic or UDF, define command, 80, 164

fonts creating with IPL, 227 downloading, 10 user-defined font, clear or define command, 80, 165 border around human-readable text, define command, 80, 165 box field create or edit command, 80, 166 defining, 28 C change origin command, 243 character bitmap origin offset, define command, 80, 167 fields, 27 fonts, 27 rotation or bar code ratio, define command, 80, 168 sets Code Page 850, 214 IBM translation, 213 international, 212 clear all data command, 80, 93 data from current field command, 80, 93 Codabar, 143 Code 11, 144 Code 128, 144 Code 16K, 147 Code 2 of 5, 143 Code 39, 142 prefix character, define command, 80, 171 table of ASCII characters, 208 Code 49, 148 Code 93, 142 Code One, 151 Code Page 850, character table, 214 code page, select, 17 codes, error, 46 command tables, load command, 80, 171 command terminator 1 command, 81, 93 command terminator 2 command, 81, 94 command terminator command, 81, 201 commands how to find in manual, 63 identifying those supported by your printer, 80 immediate, 72 listed by name, 64 listed by syntax, 68 Print mode, 76 communication port configuration, set command, 81, 116 configuration commands amount of storage, define, 114 audible alarm, enable or disable, 114 auto-transmit 1, 2, 3, disable, 115 1, enable, 115 2, enable, 115 3, enable, 115

248

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Index

configuration commands (continued) communication port configuration, set, 116 control panel access permission, set, 117 cutter, enable or disable, 118 dark adjust, set, 118 Emulation or Advanced mode on power up, 119 end-of-print skip distance, set, 120 format, create or edit, 180 IBM language translation, enable or disable, 122 intercharacter delay, set, 122 interlabel ribbon save, enable or disable, 123 label rest point, adjust, 123 retract distance, set, 124 retract, enable or disable, 124 stock type, select, 125 width, set, 125 maximum label length, set, 126 media fault recovery mode, set, 127 sensitivity number, select, 127 message delay, set, 128 number of image bands, set, 129 online or offline on power up, 130 pin 11/20 protocol, set, 130 postamble, set, 131 preamble, set, 131 print speed, set, 132 printer language, select, 133 printhead loading mode, select, 135 pressure, set, 136 test parameters, set, 136 ribbon save zones, set, 137 self-strip, enable or disable, 137 slash zero, enable, 138 takeup motor torque, increase, 139 top of form, set, 139 configuration parameters, transmit command, 81, 94 connecting the printer to a PC, 5 control characters creating ASCII with control codes, 4 table of full ASCII, 210 using printable, 4 control panel access permission, set command, 81, 117 creating ASCII text file of IPL commands, 6 one bit per byte user-defined graphics, 220 user-defined bitmap graphics, 220 user-defined fonts, 227 current edit session, save command, 81, 172 cut command, 81, 94 cutter, enable or disable command, 81, 118 D dark adjust command, in Test and Service mode, 81, 201 dark adjust, set command, 81, 118

data shift - international characters command, 81, 94 source for format in a page, define command, 81, 172 DataMatrix, 158 deleting fields, 34 human-readable field (H0), 31 description of IPL commands, 2 designing, formats, 22 determining print position of a field, 34 direct graphics commands change origin, 243 direct graphics mode, enter, 242 end of bitmap, 243 end of line, 243 raw bitmap data follows, 244 repeat last line, 244 transition black, 244 using in an example, 245 list of IPL commands, 242 mode defined, 240 enter command, 242 select command, 81, 96 requirements, 240 sending to the printer, 242 downloading auto-transmit commands, interface table, 235 escape print commands, interface table, 233 fonts one bit per byte, 227 six bits per byte, 228 using IPL commands, 18 using IPL commands, 18 with PrintSet, 11 graphics one bit per byte, 221 six bits per byte, 224 Print mode commands, interface table, 232 protocol commands, interface table, 236 shift print commands, interface table, 234 status responses, interface table, 235 E editing fields, 33 labels, 31 Emulation mode enter command, 81, 97 summary of commands supported, 57 using, 56 Emulation or Advanced mode on power up command, 81, 119 end of bitmap command, 243 of line command, 243 end-of-print skip distance, set command, 81, 120

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

249

Index

entering Print mode, 7 Program mode, 7 error codes, 46 request command, 81, 86 table, 46, 47 conditions, handling, 44 image overrun, 45 insufficient storage RAM, 45 invalid numeric character, 45 parameter, 45 syntax, 44 escape print commands, 233 example label format, 38 using direct graphics commands, 245 F factory defaults, reset command, 81, 202 field bar code, 27 character, 27 data, define source command, 81, 173 decrement, set command, 81, 98 delete command, 81, 172 deleting, 34 direction, define command, 81, 175 editing, 31, 33 first data entry, select command, 99 height, change magnification, 36 human-readable, 27 human-readable (H0), 31 increment, set command, 81, 99 label design, 27 line or box, 28 magnifying, 36 origin, define command, 81, 175 positioning, 34 reimage only modified fields, See format, select command rotating, 35 scaling, 36 select command, 81, 97 sizes, 36 width, change magnification, 36 finding commands in the manual, 63 first data entry field, select command, 81, 99 font additional RAM, 14 bit-mapped, 14 character width, define command, 81, 176 choosing the type to use, 10 create and download, 227 creating bitmap fonts, 15 descriptions, 27 downloadable types, 10 downloading with PrintSet, 11 install international character sets, 13

magnifying, 36 one bit per byte, 227 resident in printer, 28 six bits per byte, 228 sizes, 36 transmit command, 81, 103 TrueType, 14 type, select command, 82, 178 user-defined, 227 Font, Transmit command, 100 form feed command, 82, 101 format create or edit command, 82, 180 creating with IPL, 24 designing a basic, 22 direction in a page, define command, 82, 181 erase command, 82, 182 offset within a page, define command, 82, 182 position from page, delete command, 82, 183 position in a page, assign command, 82, 183 programming with IPL, 24 select command, 82, 101 transmit command, 82, 103 using, 22 formats, print command, 82, 202 full ASCII control characters table, 210 table, 208 G graphic or UDC, define command, 82, 184 graphic select command, 82, 184 graphics converting to one bit per byte, 221 creating and downloading, 224 one bit per byte, 220 user-defined bitmap, 220 six bits per byte, 224 H hardware configuration label, print command, 82, 202 height magnification of bar, box, or UDC, define command, 82, 185 HIBC Code 128, 157 39, 147 human-readable field (H0), 27, 31 create or edit command, 82, 187 deleting, 31 I IBM language translation character table, 213 enable or disable command, 82, 122 image bands description, 51 example showing how the printer uses, 53

250

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Index

image, bands (continued) function, 52 optimizing with print speed, 52 using for batch printing, 56 overrun errors, 45 immediate commands abort print job, 86 according to function, 72 error code, request, 86 label and gap length, transmit, 87 remaining quantity and batch count, transmit, 87 status dump, 88 status enquiry, 89 increasing throughput, 51 increment and decrement, disable command, 82, 104 insufficient storage RAM errors, 45 intercharacter delay, set command, 82, 122 space for UDF, define command, 82, 188 interlabel ribbon save, enable or disable command, 82, 123 Interleaved 2 of 5, 143 international character sets, 212 interpretive field edit command, 82, 189 enable or disable command, 82, 190 invalid numeric character errors, 45 IPL commands description, 2, 3 sending to the printer, 5 using to download fonts, 18 J JIS-ITF, 156 L label and gap length, transmit command, 82, 87 design fields, 27 designing formats, 22 pages, 38 editing, 31 format command description, 40, 41 example, 38 using, 22 path open sensor value, transmit command, 82, 202 rest point, adjust command, 83, 123 retract distance, set command, 83, 124 enable or disable command, 83, 124 stock type, select command, 83, 125 storing formats, 22 taken sensor value, transmit command, 83, 202 width, set command, 83, 125 languages, international character sets, 212 length of line or box field, define command, 83, 190

line field create or edit command, 83, 191 defining, 28 M magnifying bar code fields, 37 in label design, 36 manual roadmap, 8 MaxiCode, 154 maximum label length, set command, 83, 126 media fault recovery mode, set command, 83, 127 sensitivity number, select command, 83, 127 memory increasing amount available, 50 usage described, 50 limitations, 50 problems, 50 transmit command, 83, 105 message delay, set command, 83, 128 MicroPDF417, 160 N next data entry field, select command, 83, 106 number of image bands, set command, 83, 129 numeric field separator command, 83, 106 O one bit per byte graphics, creating, 220 online or offline on power up command, 83, 130 options selected, transmit command, 83, 107 outline font clear or create command, 83, 191 download command, 83, 193 downloading, 10 P page create or edit command, 83, 194 delete command, 83, 195 designing, 38 print command, 83, 203 select command, 83, 108 transmit command, 83, 108 parameter, errors, 45 PDF417, 148 pin 11/20 protocol, set command, 83, 130 pitch label, print command, 83, 203 size, set command, 83, 195 point size, set command, 83, 196 postamble, set command, 83, 131 POSTNET, 148 preamble, set command, 83, 131 print IPL command, 84, 109 line dot count limit, set command, 84, 196

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

251

Index

print (continued) quality label, print command, 84, 203 speed, adjusting for use with image bands, 52 speed, set command, 84, 132 Print mode commands according to function, 76 Advanced mode, select, 91 alphanumeric field separator, 92 batch count, set, 93 clear all data, 93 clear data from current field, 93 command terminator 1, 93 command terminator 2, 94 configuration parameters, transmit, 94 cut, 94 data shift - international characters, 94 Direct Graphics mode, select, 96 download order, 232 Emulation mode, enter, 97 field decrement, set, 98 field first data entry, select, 99 field increment, set, 99 field, select, 97 font, transmit, 100 form feed, 101 format, select, 101 format, transmit, 103 increment and decrement, disable, 104 memory usage, transmit, 105 next data entry field, select, 106 numeric field separator, 106 options selected, transmit, 107 page, select, 108 page, transmit, 108 print, 109 printhead parameters, transmit, 109 Program mode, enter, 109 program number, transmit, 110 quantity count, set, 110 start and stop codes (Code 39), print, 110 storage area usage, transmit, 111 Test and Service mode, enter, 111 user-defined character, transmit, 111 user-defined tables, transmit, 112 warm boot, 112 entering, 7 printable control characters, using, 4 printer batch printing, optimizing, 56 connecting to a PC, 5 error conditions, 44 increasing speed, 51 language, select command, 84, 133 memory, using efficiently, 50 programming, 3 RAM, understanding, 50

printhead loading mode, select command, 84, 135 parameters, transmit command, 84, 109 pressure, set command, 84, 136 resistance test, begin command, 84, 203 resistance values, transmit command, 84, 203 temperature sensor value, transmit command, 84, 203 test parameters, set command, 84, 136 volt supply value, transmit command, 84, 204 PrintSet, using to download fonts, 11 Program mode commands bar code field, create or edit, 161 bar code, select type, 141 Codabar, 143 Code 11, 144 Code 128, 144 Code 16K, 147 Code 2 of 5, 143 Code 39, 142 Code 49, 148 Code 93, 142 Code One, 151 DataMatrix, 158 HIBC Code 128, 157 HIBC Code 39, 147 Interleaved 2 of 5, 143 JIS-ITF, 156 MaxiCode, 154 MicroPDF417, 160 PDF417, 148 POSTNET, 148 QR Code, 159 UPC/EAN, 146 bitmap cell height for graphic or UDF, define, 162 cell width for graphic or UDF, define, 164 user-defined font, clear or define, 165 border around human-readable text, define, 165 box field, create or edit, 166 character bitmap origin offset, define, 167 rotation or bar code ratio, define, 168 Code 39 prefix character, define, 171 command tables, load, 171 current edit session, save, 172 data source for format in a page, define, 172 enter, 84 enter, 109 exit, 84 exit, 197 field data, define source, 173 delete, 172 direction, define, 175 origin, define, 175

252

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

Index

font character width, define, 176 type, select, 178 format direction in a page, define, 181 erase, 182 offset within a page, define, 182 position from page, delete, 183 position in a page, assign, 183 graphic or UDC, define, 184 type, select, 184 height magnification of bar, box, or UDC, define, 185 human-readable field, create or edit, 187 intercharacter space for UDF, define, 188 interpretive field edit, 189 enable or disable, 190 length of line or box field, define, 190 line field, create or edit, 191 outline font, clear or create, 191 outline font, download, 193 page, create or edit, 194 page, delete, 195 pitch size, set, 195 point size, set, 196 print line dot count limit, set, 196 Program mode, exit, 197 user-defined character field, create or edit, 197 user-defined character, clear or create, 197 user-defined font character, create, 198 width of line, box, bar, or character, define, 199 entering, 7 program number, transmit command, 84, 110 programming Intermec printers, described, 3 protocol commands, downloading, 236 Q QR Code, 159 quantity count, set command, 84, 110 R RAM, using, 50 raw bitmap data follows command, 244 reflective sensor value, transmit command, 84, 204 reimage, modified fields, 55 remaining quantity and batch count, transmit command, 84, 87 repeat last line command, 244 reset command, 84, 87 ribbon, save zones, set command, 84, 137 RLE data, 240 rotating fields, 35 run-length encoded (RLE) data, See RLE data S self-strip, enable or disable command, 84, 137 sending IPL commands to the printer, 5

using an application, 7 using HyperTerminal from Windows, 6 serial port configuration, set, See Communication Port Configuration, Set shift commands, 234 sizing bar code fields, 37 fields, 36 slash zero, enable command, 138 slash zero, enable or disable command, 84 software configuration label, print command, 84, 204 start and stop codes (Code 39), print command, 84, 110 status dump command, 84, 88 enquiry command, 84, 89 responses, 235 storage area usage, transmit command, 111 storing label formats, 22 switching between Print mode and Program mode, 7 syntax errors, 44 T takeup motor torque, increase command, 84, 139 Test and Service mode commands 12 volt supply value, transmit, 201 ambient temperature, transmit, 201 command terminator, 201 dark adjust, 201 enter, 84, 111 exit, 85, 204 factory defaults, reset, 202 formats, print, 202 hardware configuration label, print, 202 label path open sensor value, transmit, 202 label taken sensor value, transmit, 202 pages, print, 203 pitch label, print, 203 print quality label, print, 203 printhead resistance test, begin, 203 resistance values, transmit, 203 temperature sensor value, transmit, 203 volt supply value, transmit, 204 software configuration label, print, 204 transmissive sensor value, transmit, 204 user-defined characters and graphics, print, 204 user-defined fonts, print, 205 throughput, increasing, 51 top of form, set command, 85, 139 transition black command, 244 transmissive sensor value, transmit command, 85, 204 troubleshooting checklist, 44 U UPC/EAN, 146 user-defined bitmap graphics, creating, 220

IPL Programmers Reference Manual

253

Index

user-defined (continued) character clear or create command, 85, 197 field, create or edit command, 85, 197 transmit command, 85, 111 characters and graphics, print command, 85, 204 commands, replacing, 231 font character, clear or create command, 85, 198 fonts, creating, 227 fonts, print command, 85, 205 tables, transmit command, 85, 112 using Emulation mode, 56 W warm boot command, 85, 112 width of line, box, bar, or character, define command, 85, 199

254

IPL Programmers Reference Manual